WO2021217629A1 - Positioning method and apparatus - Google Patents

Positioning method and apparatus Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2021217629A1
WO2021217629A1 PCT/CN2020/088447 CN2020088447W WO2021217629A1 WO 2021217629 A1 WO2021217629 A1 WO 2021217629A1 CN 2020088447 W CN2020088447 W CN 2020088447W WO 2021217629 A1 WO2021217629 A1 WO 2021217629A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
positioning
lmc
information
network device
indication information
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/088447
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
郝金平
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/088447 priority Critical patent/WO2021217629A1/en
Priority to CN202080100293.4A priority patent/CN115462133A/en
Publication of WO2021217629A1 publication Critical patent/WO2021217629A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W64/00Locating users or terminals or network equipment for network management purposes, e.g. mobility management

Definitions

  • This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a positioning method and device.
  • a location management function (LMF) entity can be deployed in the core network, and the LMF entity can be used to receive location requests from access and mobility management function (AMF) entities , Decide on the method used for positioning measurement (this decision can be based on the capabilities of the terminal and the network, or based on the information contained in the positioning request, etc.), determine the network device to locate the terminal, and request the network device or terminal for the assistance needed for positioning Information, sending auxiliary information required for positioning to the terminal or network device, requesting measurement information from the terminal or network device, calculating the location of the terminal, etc.
  • LMF location management function
  • AMF access and mobility management function
  • LMF local LMF
  • LMC location management component
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a positioning method and device, which are used to solve the problem of implementing the function of the LMC.
  • a positioning method including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element Registration response, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
  • the core network can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function.
  • the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the LMC can support multiple positioning types, thereby expanding the scope of application of this application.
  • the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC can support RI-LR.
  • the function of LMC can be under the jurisdiction of the core network. Within range.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • a positioning method including: a core network element receives a registration request from an LMC, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the core network element sends to the LMC Registration response, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
  • the core network can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function.
  • the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the LMC can support multiple positioning types, thereby expanding the scope of application of this application.
  • the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC can support RI-LR.
  • the function of LMC can be under the jurisdiction of the core network. Within range.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • a positioning method including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element A registration response, where the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0; the LMC sends information to each of the M1 network devices Second indication information corresponding to each network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal, thereby solving the problem.
  • the network equipment that deploys the LMC initiates the positioning problem.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M1 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the M2 where the information of the second positioning type changes.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the M2 where the information of the second positioning type changes.
  • M2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the network device whose information about the second positioning type has changed.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second network device.
  • Positioning type the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices.
  • the LMC may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives second indication information from an LMC, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the network device supports a second positioning type; When locating the terminal, the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal, thereby solving the problem.
  • the network equipment that deploys the LMC initiates the positioning problem.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives third indication information from the LMC, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the network device supports the second positioning type .
  • the LMC may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a core network element determines second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type, and M3 is An integer greater than 0; the core network element sends the second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the core network element can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device supporting the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sending third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports all For the second positioning type, the first network device is any one of the M4 network devices, the M4 network devices are network devices that support changes in the information of the second positioning type, and M4 is greater than An integer of 0.
  • the core network element may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives second indication information from a core network element, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the network device supports a second positioning type; When the service terminal needs to be located, the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
  • the core network element can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives third indication information from the core network element, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the network device supports the first 2. Positioning type.
  • the core network element may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element A registration response, where the registration response includes information about N1 cells that support the second positioning type, the N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0; the LMC sends a message to the M5
  • Each of the network devices sends fourth indication information corresponding to each of the network devices, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the fourth The cell indicated by the indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate terminals in certain cells by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs. Position the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the registration response further includes information of the M5 network devices.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M5 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the N2 where the information of the second positioning type changes.
  • the relevant information of each cell, N2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the cell whose information about the second positioning type changes.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports In the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells.
  • the LMC may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives fourth indication information from an LMC, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support a second positioning type, and the fourth indication information The indicated cell belongs to the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate terminals in certain cells by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs. Position the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives fifth indication information from the LMC, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the network device supports the The second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells, the N2 cells are the cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N2 is an integer greater than 0 .
  • the LMC may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a core network element determines fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, The cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network equipment corresponding to the fourth indication information, and M6 is an integer greater than 0; the core network element sends a connection to each of the M6 network equipments.
  • the core network element can authorize the network device to use the first method when it needs to locate the terminal in some cell by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs.
  • the second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sends fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first network device of the second network device.
  • the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells
  • the N3 cells are the cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes
  • the core network element may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives fourth indication information from a core network element, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support a second positioning type, and the first 4.
  • the cell indicated by the indication information belongs to the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the core network element sends the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to use the first The second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives fifth indication information from the core network element, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the network device is Supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N3 is greater than An integer of 0.
  • the core network element may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, where the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; A registration response is received.
  • the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals and Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type.
  • the Q1 terminals access M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0; the LMC Send sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type ,
  • the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate certain terminals by sending the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type.
  • the terminal performs positioning, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M7 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support Q2 when the information of the second positioning type changes.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support Q2 when the information of the second positioning type changes.
  • Related information of each terminal, Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the terminal whose information of the second positioning type has changed.
  • the method further includes: the LMC sends seventh indication information to a third network device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate a first terminal accessing the third network device Whether to support the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
  • the LMC may update the information of whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives sixth indication information from an LMC, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support a second positioning type, and the sixth indication The one or more terminals indicated by the information access the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the LMC sends the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate certain terminals.
  • the terminal performs positioning, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives seventh indication information from the LMC, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the network device supports For the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of Q2 terminals, the Q2 terminals are terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, and Q2 is greater than 0 Integer.
  • the LMC may update the information of whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning method including: a core network element determines sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type , The one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information, and M8 is an integer greater than 0; the core network element sends the message to the M8 network devices Each network device in sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device.
  • the core network element sends the sixth instruction information to the network device that supports the terminal of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second The positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the core network element sending seventh indication information to a third network device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate the access to the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed , Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the core network element may update the information about whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
  • a method for implementing the sixth indication information is provided.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • whether the terminal supports the second positioning type information is reported by the terminal to the core network element, or whether the terminal supports the second positioning type information It is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored by the core network element.
  • two methods are provided for the core network element to obtain information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type.
  • a positioning method including: a network device receives sixth indication information from a core network element, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support a second positioning type, and The one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the core network element sends the sixth instruction information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second The positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element.
  • the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the method further includes: the network device receives seventh indication information from the core network element, where the seventh indication information is used to instruct the first network device to access the network device.
  • the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, Q3 Is an integer greater than 0.
  • the core network element may update the information about whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
  • a method for implementing the sixth indication information is provided.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to The core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicate the positioning type supported by the positioning device; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning device supports the first positioning type.
  • the positioning types supported by the positioning device include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive a registration request from the LMC through the communication unit, the registration request being used to request registration to the positioning The processing unit is further configured to send a registration response to the LMC through the communication unit, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the type of positioning supported by the LMC Or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
  • the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the positioning device is AMF or LMF.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to The core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, M1 is an integer greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send second indication information corresponding to each of the M1 network devices to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit, the The second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning apparatus to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported Information about the changed M2 network devices, where M2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first network device through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports In the second positioning type, the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive second indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the second indication information is used to indicate The positioning device supports the second positioning type; the processing unit is further configured to send a positioning request to the LMC through the communication unit when the positioning device needs to locate a terminal to be served.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive third indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning apparatus supports the first 2. Positioning type.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices, and the second indication information is used to indicate the corresponding The network device supports the second positioning type, and M3 is an integer greater than 0; the communication unit is configured to send corresponding second indication information to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning Type, the first network device is any one of M4 network devices, the M4 network devices are network devices whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and M4 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive second indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, and the second indication information is used for Instructing the positioning device to support the second positioning type; the processing unit is further configured to send a positioning request to the LMC through the communication unit when the positioning device needs to locate the terminal to be served.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is configured to receive third indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning device supports The second positioning type.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration To the core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes information about N1 cells supporting the second positioning type, The N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send the data to each of the M5 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the registration response further includes information of the M5 network devices.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M5 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported Information about the N2 cells that have changed, where N2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send fifth instruction information to the second network device through the communication unit, and the fifth instruction information is used to indicate the second network device's Whether a cell supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate Support one or more cells of the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the positioning apparatus; the processing unit is further configured to: When the terminal in the cell is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive fifth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the positioning device is The second positioning type is supported, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells, the N2 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, and N2 is greater than An integer of 0.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate support One or more cells of the second positioning type, the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information, and M6 is an integer greater than 0; the communication unit is configured to report to the M6 Each of the network devices sends corresponding fourth instruction information.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the communication unit is further configured to send fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports all For the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N3 is greater than 0 Integer.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, the fourth indication information It is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the communication device; the processing unit is also used to indicate when the communication device needs to support the second positioning When a terminal in a cell of a positioning type is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive fifth indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the second indication of the communication device.
  • the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, and the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, N3 is an integer greater than zero.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration To the core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, and the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type, The Q1 terminal accesses M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send data to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the sixth indication information corresponding to each network device, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information The terminal accesses the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  • the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported
  • the related information of Q2 terminals that have changed, Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send seventh indication information to a third network device through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive sixth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate Support one or more terminals of the second positioning type, the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the communication device; the processing unit is further configured to support the communication device when the communication device needs to support When the terminal of the second positioning type is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive seventh indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to access the communication device.
  • the terminal supports the second positioning type
  • the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals
  • the Q2 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, Q2 Is an integer greater than 0.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine, through the communication unit, sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices, the sixth indication The information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information, and M8 is greater than 0 Integer; the processing unit is further configured to send the sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M8 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to send seventh indication information to a third network device through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are whether the information about whether to support the second positioning type changes Terminal, Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is reported by the terminal to the communication device, or the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the In the contract information of the terminal stored in the communication device.
  • a positioning device including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive sixth indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, the sixth indication information It is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the communication device; the processing unit is also used to connect to the communication device When it is necessary to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
  • the processing unit is further configured to receive seventh indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, where the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the communication device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are whether the information about whether to support the second positioning type changes Terminal, Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • a positioning device including a processor.
  • the processor is connected to the memory, and the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so as to implement any method provided in any one of the first aspect to the fourteenth aspect.
  • the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be independent devices. In the latter case, the memory may be located in the positioning device or outside the positioning device.
  • the processor includes a logic circuit, and also includes at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the output interface is used to execute the sending action in the corresponding method
  • the input interface is used to execute the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • the positioning device further includes a communication interface and a communication bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are connected through the communication bus.
  • the communication interface is used to perform the sending and receiving actions in the corresponding method.
  • the communication interface may also be called a transceiver.
  • the communication interface includes at least one of a transmitter and a receiver. In this case, the transmitter is used to perform the sending action in the corresponding method, and the receiver is used to perform the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • the positioning device exists in the form of a chip product.
  • a positioning device which includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and running on the processor. When the computer program is executed, the positioning device executes the first to fourteenth aspects. Any method provided by any one of the aspects.
  • a positioning device including: a processor and an interface, the processor is coupled with the memory through the interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or computer execution instruction in the memory, the first aspect to the tenth aspect are Any one of the methods provided by any one of the four aspects is executed.
  • a computer-readable storage medium including computer-executable instructions.
  • the computer-executable instructions run on a computer, the computer executes any of the aspects provided in any one of the first to fourteenth aspects. a way.
  • a computer program product including computer-executable instructions, which when the computer-executable instructions run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the aspects provided in the first to fourteenth aspects method.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of yet another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 12 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart of still another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • 15 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of another positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • A/B can mean A or B.
  • “And/or” in this article is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships.
  • a and/or B can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. These three situations.
  • “at least one” means one or more, and “plurality” means two or more.
  • the words “first” and “second” do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and the words “first” and “second” do not limit the difference.
  • the method provided in the embodiments of this application can be applied to long term evolution (LTE) systems, fifth-generation (5th-generation, 5G) systems, new radio (NR) systems, and wireless local area networks. , WLAN) system and future evolution system or a variety of communication integration systems.
  • the 5G system can be a non-standalone (NSA) 5G system or a standalone (SA) 5G system.
  • SA standalone
  • the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to a 5G system or an NR system as an example to illustrate the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the access network of the 5G system or the NR system may be referred to as the next generation (NG)-radio access network (RAN).
  • NG next generation
  • RAN radio access network
  • One or more network devices can be included in the NG-RAN.
  • a network device is an entity on the network side that is used to send signals, or receive signals, or send signals and receive signals, and is used to provide wireless communication functions for the terminal.
  • the network equipment included in the NG-RAN may be a next generation node base station (gNB), a next generation evolved NodeB (ng-eNB), and so on.
  • gNB next generation node base station
  • ng-eNB next generation evolved NodeB
  • the network device can be a complete entity or a separate architecture.
  • the network equipment includes a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU).
  • CU realizes part of the functions of network equipment
  • DU realizes part of the functions of network equipment.
  • the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions.
  • the DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical (physical, PHY) layers.
  • RLC radio link control
  • MAC media access control
  • PHY physical layers.
  • the CU may also be in a form in which the user plane (UP) (referred to as CU-UP in this article) and the control plane (CP) (referred to as CU-CP in this article) are separated.
  • UP user plane
  • CP control plane
  • the network equipment involved in terminal positioning in NG-RAN includes gNB and ng-eNB.
  • LMF and AMF are located in the core network.
  • AMF is the interface between network equipment and core network, including access management and mobility management-related functions, and is mainly responsible for forwarding the positioning-related messages between the terminal and the LMF and the network equipment and the LMF.
  • LMF is used to receive the positioning request from the AMF, determine the method used for positioning measurement (the decision can be based on the capabilities of the terminal and the network, or based on the information contained in the positioning request, etc.), determine the network device to locate the terminal and report it to the network
  • the device or terminal requests auxiliary information required for positioning, sends the auxiliary information required for positioning to the terminal or network device, requests measurement information from the terminal or network device, calculates the position of the terminal, and so on.
  • the interfaces between the various network elements can be seen in Figure 1, which will not be repeated here.
  • the location service comes from a location service entity in the core network (for example, a gateway mobile location center (GMLC)).
  • the location service entity can specify A certain terminal performs positioning.
  • the location service entity may send a location service request (hereinafter referred to as the location request) to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives the location request, it sends the location request to the LMF.
  • the LMF initiates and executes the location measurement process , Obtain positioning measurement information through the positioning measurement process, calculate the position of the terminal according to the positioning measurement information, and send the position information of the terminal to the AMF, and then the AMF to the positioning service entity.
  • NI-LR Network-induced location request
  • AMF the operator's network initiates the location itself. Specifically, if the AMF needs the location information of the terminal, it sends a location request to the LMF. After receiving the location request, the LMF initiates and executes the location measurement process, obtains the location measurement information through the location measurement process, calculates the location of the terminal based on the location measurement information, and Send the location information of the terminal to the AMF.
  • MO-LR Mobile originated location request
  • the location service comes from the terminal itself.
  • the terminal sends a location request to the AMF, and the AMF obtains the location information of the terminal from the LMF (the specific process is similar to the specific implementation process of MT-LR, and will not be repeated here), and sends the location information of the terminal to the terminal.
  • the LMC can be deployed in the network equipment.
  • the network device can directly send a positioning request to the deployed LMC, which is different from the positioning request received by the LMF in the traditional positioning architecture from the AMF.
  • the location type of the location request sent by the network device may be referred to as a radio access network initiated location request (RAN induced location request, RI-LR).
  • RAN induced location request RI-LR
  • the method provided by this application is described by taking the network device sending a location request to the LMC as an example.
  • the network device can also send a location request to the AMF or LMF sends a positioning request.
  • LMC can be deployed in NG-RAN, and there are three possible ways of deploying LMC on NG-RAN:
  • Method 1 In the case that the network device is a complete entity, the LMC is deployed on the network device and belongs to the functional module of the network device. Refer to Figure 2 for details.
  • Method 2 In the case of a separate architecture of the network equipment, the LMC is deployed on the network equipment, and the LMC is an independent logical network element and has logic with the CU (or CU-CP of the network equipment) of the network equipment where it is located interface. As shown in Fig. 3, in Fig. 3, a logical interface between the LMC and the CU of the network device where it is located is taken as an example for drawing.
  • the LMC is an independent logical network element and is connected to multiple network devices (or CU of the network device or CU-CP of the network device). Refer to Figure 4. In Figure 4, the LMC is connected to multiple network devices as an example for drawing.
  • LMC deployment methods of LMC shown in Figures 2 to 4 are only exemplary. In actual implementation, the number of network devices participating in terminal positioning can be greater, and the deployment of LMCs is not limited to those shown in the figure. The position shown, any LMC deployment method, and the method provided in the embodiment of this application can be applicable.
  • the LMC in the architecture shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4 can also support any one of NI-LR, MT-LR, and MO-LR in addition to supporting RI-LR. kind.
  • AMF does not send a location request to LMF, but sends a location request to LMC.
  • LMC After receiving the location request, LMC initiates and executes the location measurement process, which is obtained through the location measurement process Position measurement information, calculate the position of the terminal according to the position measurement information, and send the position information of the terminal to the AMF.
  • this application provides a positioning method, as shown in Figure 5, including:
  • the LMC sends a registration request to a core network element.
  • the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the registration request may also be referred to as an LMC registration (LMC registration) message.
  • LMC registration LMC registration
  • the core network element sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
  • the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
  • the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the registration response may also be referred to as an LMC registration confirmation (LMC registration ACK) message.
  • LMC registration ACK LMC registration confirmation
  • the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • the first indication information may directly indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC.
  • the first indication information may be a list, and the list includes information about the positioning type supported by the LMC.
  • the first indication information may also be multiple bits, and the value of the multiple bits is used to indicate which positioning types the terminal supports.
  • multiple bits can be 2 bits. When the value of 2 bits is 00, it means that LMC supports NI-LR and MT-LR. When the value of 2 bits is 10, it means that LMC supports MT-LR and MO. -LR, when the value of 2 bits is 01, it means that LMC supports MO-LR and RI-LR, and when the value of 2 bits is 11, it means that LMC supports NI-LR and RI-LR.
  • the multiple bits are 4 bits, each of the 4 bits corresponds to a positioning type, and the value of 1 bit is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the corresponding positioning type.
  • the first bit corresponds to NI-LR
  • the second bit corresponds to MT-LR
  • the third bit corresponds to MO-LR
  • the fourth bit corresponds to RI-LR.
  • the value of 1 bit is 1, it means that the LMC supports the corresponding positioning type.
  • the value of 4 bits is 0001, it means that LMC supports RI-LR, but does not support NI-LR, MT-LR, and MO-LR.
  • the value of 4 bits is 1110, it means that LMC supports NI-LR, MT-LR and MO-LR, but does not support RI-LR.
  • the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  • 1 bit can be used to indicate whether the LMC supports the positioning type.
  • the first indication information can indicate whether RI-LR is supported by 1 bit. When the value of this bit is 0, it means that LMC does not support RI-LR. When the value of this bit is 1, it means that LMC supports RI-LR. . The reverse is also possible.
  • the core network element can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function.
  • LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC supports RI-LR.
  • the function of the LMC can be within the jurisdiction of the core network.
  • this application also provides a positioning method.
  • the positioning method can be implemented in several ways.
  • a network device that supports a certain positioning type (denoted as the second positioning type) can use the second positioning type for positioning of all terminals served.
  • the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs can use the second positioning type to locate all terminals in the cell.
  • a network device that supports access of a terminal of the second positioning type can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal.
  • Implementation manner 1 A network device that supports the second positioning type can use the second positioning type for positioning of all terminals served.
  • the LMC or the core network element can instruct the network device to support the second positioning type.
  • the following uses scenario 1.1 (LMC indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type) and scenario 1.2 (the core network element indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type). Two positioning types) respectively describe the positioning methods provided in this application.
  • the LMC indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the LMC sends a registration request to the core network element.
  • the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the core network element sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
  • the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the information of the network device may be the identity of the network device or the information of the cell of the network device (for example, the cell identity), and the like.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the information of the M1 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NG interface application layer protocol (NG)
  • NG NG interface application layer protocol
  • the application protocol (NGAP) message or the newly defined NGAP message is not limited to registration requests and registration responses. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
  • the LMC sends second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M1 network devices, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
  • the M1 network devices receive the second indication information from the LMC.
  • the second indication information sent by LMC to network device 1 is used to indicate that network device 1 supports the second positioning type, and LMC sends network device 1 and network device 2 respectively.
  • the second indication information sent by the device 2 is used to indicate that the network device 2 supports the second positioning type.
  • the second indication information may be carried in an existing message (for example, an existing Xn interface application protocol (Xn application protocol, XnAP) message) or a new message (for example, LMC service indication (LMC service indication) message).
  • the network device may also reply with a response to an existing message or a new message, where the response to the new message may be called LMC service indication ACK (LMC service indication ACK) information.
  • LMC service indication ACK LMC service indication ACK
  • the third indication information, the fourth indication information, the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information, and the seventh indication information in the following are similar to the second indication information, and will not be repeated hereafter.
  • the LMC service indication message and the LMC service indication confirmation message are only examples of the name of the new message, and may also be other names, which are not limited in this application.
  • the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M1 network devices.
  • M1 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located (at this time, the LMC is deployed in the network device) or the identity of the LMC (at this time, the LMC can be deployed in the network device or outside the network device ).
  • the second indication information and the location information of the LMC may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device can determine which device to send the location request to when it needs to locate the terminal to be served. It should be noted that the location information of the LMC may not be sent by the LMC to the network device, but may be pre-configured in each network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • step 602 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support relevant information of M2 network devices whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and M2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • the update information may be carried in an existing message or a new message (for example, an LMC function update message). Similar to the LMC service indication message and the LMC service indication confirmation message, the LMC function update message is only an example of the name of the new message, and may also be other names, which is not limited in this application.
  • the updated information is the updated information of the network device supporting the second positioning type (for example, the identification of the network device).
  • LMC can determine which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have never supported the second positioning type. The type has changed to support the second positioning type.
  • the LMC can It is determined that the network device 2 has changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and the network device 3 has never supported the second positioning type but has changed to supporting the second positioning type.
  • the update information is the information of the M2 network devices that support the second positioning type information (for example, the identification of the network device), and the LMC will update the information according to the network devices that support the second positioning type before the update. Determine which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type.
  • the M2 network devices that support the change in the information of the second positioning type are network device 1 and network device 3.
  • the LMC can determine that the network device 2 has changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and that the network device 3 has never supported the second positioning type but has changed to supporting the second positioning type.
  • the updated information is the information of the network device that does not support the second positioning type from supporting the second positioning type (for example, the identification of the network device), and the information is changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the first positioning type.
  • Information of the network device of the positioning type for example, the identification of the network device.
  • the update information is the information of the M2 network devices that support the change in the information of the second positioning type, and whether the change information of the second positioning type is supported (specifically which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the first positioning type). The second positioning type and which network devices have changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type).
  • the LMC can directly determine according to the update information which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have never supported the second positioning type but have changed to supporting the second positioning type.
  • the update information can be found in Table 3.
  • LMC can determine that network device 1 and network device 2 have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and network device 3 and network device 4 never support The second positioning type has changed to support the second positioning type.
  • Step 605, step 603, and step 604 are executed in no particular order.
  • step 605 the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices.
  • the first network device receives the third indication information from the LMC.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first network device does not support the second positioning type.
  • the first network device It belongs to the M1 network device, and in the subsequent process, the first network device does not send a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the third indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first network device supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first network device does not belong to M1
  • the network device sends a location request to the LMC when the first network device needs to locate the terminal to be served.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
  • Scenario 1.2 The core network element instructs the network device to support the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the core network element determines second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices.
  • the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the core network element sends second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the M3 network devices receive the second indication information from the core network element.
  • M3 is an integer greater than zero.
  • the second indication information sent by the core network element to network device 1 is used to indicate that network device 1 supports the second positioning type.
  • the second indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that the network device 2 supports the second positioning type.
  • the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the second indication information may be carried in an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF Configuration Update (AMF Configuration Update) message) or a new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
  • an existing NGAP message for example, an AMF Configuration Update (AMF Configuration Update) message
  • AMF Configuration Update AMF Configuration Update
  • new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
  • the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices.
  • the M3 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network network element.
  • the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located (at this time, the LMC is deployed in the network device) or the identity of the LMC (at this time, the LMC can be deployed in the network device or outside the network device ).
  • the second indication information and the location information of the LMC may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the network device can determine which device to send the location request to when it needs to locate the terminal to be served. It should be noted that the location information of the LMC may not be sent to the network device by the core network element, but is pre-configured in each network device, which is not limited in this application.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends the information of the M3 network devices supporting the second positioning type to the LMC.
  • the LMC can only process the positioning requests sent by M3 network devices, and the LMC does not process the positioning requests sent by other network devices.
  • the LMC may send a registration request to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC and sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the registration response may include M3 network devices that support the second positioning type. Information.
  • the information of the M3 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, a message after the registration is completed (for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message), not limited to registration requests and registration responses.
  • a message after the registration is completed for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message
  • the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
  • Step 702, step 702A, and step 702B are executed in no particular order.
  • step 703 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the M4 network devices whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and M4 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • step 704 is similar to the above step 605, which can be understood by referring to it, and will not be repeated here.
  • step 703 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends third indication information to the first network device.
  • the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the first network device is any one of the M4 network devices.
  • the first network device receives the third indication information from the core network element.
  • Step 705 and step 704 are executed in no particular order.
  • the core network element sends the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal. Perform positioning to solve the problem of positioning initiated by network devices that have not deployed LMC.
  • Implementation manner 2 The network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs can use the second positioning type to locate all terminals in the cell.
  • the LMC or the core network element can indicate to the network device the cell that supports the second positioning type.
  • the following uses scenario 2.1 (LMC indicates the cell that supports the second positioning type to the network device) and scenario 2.2 (core network network The element instructs the network equipment to support the cells of the second positioning type) respectively to explain the positioning methods provided in this application.
  • the LMC indicates to the network device a cell that supports the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the LMC sends a registration request to the core network element.
  • the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the core network element sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the registration response includes information about N1 cells supporting the second positioning type, N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
  • a cell belonging to one network device can be understood as the network device supporting the cell.
  • the registration response also includes information about M5 network devices.
  • the M5 network devices have a corresponding relationship with the N1 cells, and the LMC can determine the network device to which any one of the N1 cells belongs according to the corresponding relationship.
  • the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the information of the cell may be a cell identity or the like.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the information of the N1 cells can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NGAP message (for example, AMF configuration update) Message) or new NGAP message), not limited to registration request and registration response.
  • the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
  • the LMC sends fourth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M5 network devices.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information.
  • the M5 network devices receive the fourth indication information from the LMC.
  • the fourth LMC sends to network equipment 1.
  • the indication information is used to indicate that cell 1 and cell 2 support the second positioning type, and the fourth indication information sent by the LMC to the network device 2 is used to indicate that cell 3 supports the second positioning type.
  • the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M5 network devices.
  • M5 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • step 803A For descriptions related to step 803A, refer to the above step 603A, which will not be repeated.
  • step 802 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the N2 cells where the information of the second positioning type is changed, and N2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • step 805 is similar to step 605.
  • the information that supports the second positioning type changes here is the information of the cell, not the information of the network device.
  • step 605 For details, please refer to the relevant description of step 605 for understanding. , Replace M2 network devices with N2 cells for understanding, so I won’t repeat them here.
  • Step 805, step 803, and step 804 are executed in no particular order.
  • step 805 the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends fifth indication information to the second network device.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports the second positioning type, and the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells.
  • the second network device receives the fifth indication information from the LMC.
  • the fifth indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first cell does not support the second positioning type.
  • the first cell belongs to N1
  • the second network device determines not to locate the terminal in the first cell. If the first cell changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type, the fifth indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first cell supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first cell does not belong to N1 cells.
  • the second network device when the second network device needs to locate the terminal in the first cell, it sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the LMC sends fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to use the first The second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • Scenario 2.2 The core network element instructs the network device to support the cell of the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the core network element determines fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices.
  • the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information.
  • M6 is an integer greater than zero.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the core network element sends fourth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M6 network devices.
  • the network device receives the fourth indication information from the core network element.
  • the fourth indication information indicates that one or more cells supporting the second positioning type are cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3, cell 1 and cell 2 belong to network device 1, and cell 3 belongs to network device 2, then the core The fourth indication information sent by the network element to the network device 1 is used to indicate that cell 1 and cell 2 support the second positioning type, and the fourth indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that cell 3 supports the second positioning type. type.
  • the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the fourth indication information may be carried in an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) or a new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
  • an existing NGAP message for example, an AMF configuration update message
  • a new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
  • the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices.
  • the M6 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element.
  • step 902A For descriptions related to step 902A, refer to the above step 702A, which will not be repeated.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends information about M6 network devices to the LMC.
  • the LMC can only process the location requests sent by M6 network devices, and the LMC does not process location requests sent by other network devices.
  • the LMC may send a registration request to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC and sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the registration response may include information about M6 network devices.
  • the information of the M6 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, a message after the registration is completed (for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message), not limited to registration requests and registration responses.
  • a message after the registration is completed for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message
  • the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
  • Step 902 step 902A, and step 902B are executed in no particular order.
  • step 903 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the N3 cells where the information of the second positioning type is changed, and N3 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • step 904 is similar to the above step 805, which can be understood by reference, and will not be repeated.
  • step 903 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends fifth indication information to the second network device.
  • the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports the second positioning type, and the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells.
  • the second network device receives the fifth indication information from the core network element.
  • the core network element sends the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to locate the terminal in certain cells. , Use the second positioning type to locate the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • Implementation manner 3 The network device that supports the access of the terminal of the second positioning type can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal.
  • the LMC or the core network element can indicate to the network device the terminal that supports the second positioning type, or the terminal indicates to the network device whether it supports the second positioning type, the following scenario 3.1 (LMC indicates support to the network device The second positioning type terminal), scenario 3.2 (the core network element instructs the network device to support the terminal of the second positioning type) and scenario 3.3 (the terminal indicates to the network device whether to support the second positioning type) the positioning methods provided in this application respectively Explain.
  • scenario 3.1 LMC indicates support to the network device The second positioning type terminal
  • scenario 3.2 the core network element instructs the network device to support the terminal of the second positioning type
  • scenario 3.3 the terminal indicates to the network device whether to support the second positioning type
  • the LMC indicates to the network device a terminal that supports the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the LMC sends a registration request to a core network element.
  • the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element.
  • the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the core network element sends a registration response to the LMC.
  • the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type, Q1 terminals access M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
  • the registration response also includes information about M7 network devices.
  • the M7 network devices have a corresponding relationship with the Q1 terminals, and the LMC can determine the network device accessed by any one of the Q1 terminals according to the corresponding relationship.
  • the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is reported by the terminal to the core network element.
  • the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type can be carried in the RRC setup complete (RRCsetupComplete) message (at this time, the core network element is AMF), or it can be carried in the terminal capability report sent by the terminal to the LMF
  • the LTE positioning protocol (LTE positioning protocol, LPP) message (at this time, the core network element is LMF) can also be carried in other messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the core network element.
  • the Q1 terminal information can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NGAP message (for example, AMF configuration update) Message) or new NGAP message), not limited to registration request and registration response.
  • the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the information of the terminal may be a terminal identification or the like.
  • the LMC sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices.
  • the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  • M7 network devices receive the sixth indication information from the LMC.
  • the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M7 network devices.
  • M7 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  • step 1003A For the description related to step 1003A, refer to the above step 603A, which will not be repeated.
  • step 1002 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of Q2 terminals whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • step 1005 is similar to step 605.
  • the information that supports the second positioning type changes here is the information of the terminal, not the information of the network device.
  • the relevant description of step 605 for understanding please refer to the relevant description of step 605 for understanding. , Replace M2 network devices with Q2 terminals for understanding, so I won’t go into details here.
  • Step 1005, step 1003, and step 1004 are executed in no particular order.
  • step 1005 the method further includes:
  • the LMC sends seventh indication information to the third network device.
  • the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the third network device supports the second positioning type, and the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
  • the third network device receives the seventh indication information from the LMC.
  • the seventh indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first terminal does not support the second positioning type.
  • the first terminal belongs to Q1.
  • the second network device determines not to locate the first terminal. If the first terminal changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type, the seventh indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first terminal supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first terminal does not belong to the Q1 terminal.
  • the second network device when the second network device needs to locate the first terminal, it sends a location request to the LMC.
  • a possible scenario in which the first terminal changes from supporting the second positioning type to no longer supporting the second positioning type is: the first terminal moves out of the jurisdiction of the LMC.
  • the jurisdiction of the LMC may be the coverage of all network devices that can request positioning from the LMC.
  • a possible scenario in which the first terminal changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type is: the first terminal moves into the jurisdiction of the LMC.
  • the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning when it needs to locate certain terminals by sending the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type.
  • the type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • Scenario 3.2 The core network element instructs the network device to support the terminal of the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • a core network element determines sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices.
  • the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals (denoted as Q4 terminals) that support the second positioning type, and Q4 terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  • Q4 terminals denoted as Q4 terminals
  • Both M8 and Q4 are integers greater than zero.
  • the second positioning type is RI-LR.
  • the core network element is AMF or LMF.
  • the core network element can determine by itself which terminals support the second positioning type. For example, the information about whether each terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the core network element, and the core network element determines which terminals support the second positioning type according to the information.
  • the core network element may determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to information received from other core network elements. For example, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the UDM, and the AMF can obtain the subscription information of the terminal from the UDM. In this case, when the core network element is the AMF, the AMF may determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to the subscription information of each terminal. When the core network element is the LMF, the LMF can obtain the subscription information of the terminal from the AMF, so as to determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to the subscription information of each terminal.
  • the core network element receives the information of the terminal supporting the second positioning type from other core network elements.
  • the core network element is the LMF
  • the AMF determines which terminals support the second positioning type, and the LMF can obtain this information from the AMF.
  • the core network element determines which terminals support the second positioning type according to the information reported by the terminal whether it supports the second positioning type.
  • the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type can be carried in the RRC establishment complete message (at this time, the core network element is AMF), or it can be carried in the LTE positioning sent by the terminal to the LMF for terminal capability reporting In the protocol message (at this time, the core network element is LMF), it can also be carried in other messages, which is not limited in this application.
  • the core network element sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M8 network devices.
  • the M8 network devices receive the sixth indication information from the core network network element.
  • the Q4 terminals are terminal 1, terminal 2, and terminal 3 respectively, terminal 1 and terminal 2 are connected to network device 1, and terminal 3 is connected to network device 2, then the core network element sends the network device to the network device.
  • the sixth indication information sent by 1 is used to indicate that the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 support the second positioning type
  • the sixth indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that the terminal 3 supports the second positioning type.
  • the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
  • the sixth indication information may be carried in an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) exchanged between the AMF and the network device, or may be carried in other messages exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
  • Initial Context Setup Request Initial Context Setup Request
  • the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices.
  • the M8 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network network element.
  • step 1102A For descriptions related to step 1102A, refer to the above step 702A, which will not be repeated.
  • the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends information about M8 network devices to the LMC.
  • step 1102B For the description related to step 1102B, refer to the foregoing step 902B, which will not be repeated.
  • step 1103 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends update information to the LMC.
  • the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of Q3 terminals whose information of the second positioning type changes, and Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
  • the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
  • step 1104 is similar to the above step 1005, which can be understood by reference, and will not be repeated.
  • step 1103 the method further includes:
  • the core network element sends seventh indication information to the third network device.
  • the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the third network device supports the second positioning type, and the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals.
  • the third network device receives the seventh indication information from the core network element.
  • the core network element sends the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use when it needs to locate certain terminals.
  • the second positioning type locates the terminal, thereby solving the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
  • the core network element may determine the terminals that support the second positioning type at one time, and instruct the M8 network devices to support the terminals of the second positioning type at one time.
  • the core network element can also indicate to the network device whether the current terminal supports the second positioning type during the process of each terminal accessing the core network, that is, if the above Q4 terminals are multiple terminals, the core network element must After a period of time, the process of indicating to the M8 network devices the terminal supporting the second positioning type can be completed.
  • a process in which the core network element is an AMF and a terminal accesses the core network is taken as an example to illustrate the process of indicating to the network device whether the current terminal supports the second positioning type.
  • the terminal sends an RRC establishment complete message to a network device.
  • the network device receives the RRC establishment complete message from the terminal.
  • the network device sends an initial terminal message (Initial UE message) to the AMF.
  • the AMF receives the initial terminal message from the network device.
  • the AMF sends an initial context establishment request to the network device, where the initial context establishment request carries sixth indication information.
  • the network device receives the initial context establishment request from the AMF.
  • the sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the second positioning type.
  • each message in FIG. 12 can be referred to in the prior art.
  • the difference from the prior art is that this application carries the sixth indication information in the initial context establishment request.
  • Scenario 3.3 The terminal indicates to the network device whether to support the second positioning type.
  • the positioning method includes:
  • the terminal sends eighth indication information to a network device.
  • the eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal supports the second positioning type.
  • the network device receives the eighth indication information from the terminal.
  • the terminal may send information about whether the second positioning type is supported to the network device during the process of accessing the network device, and the network device stores the information in the terminal context.
  • the eighth indication information may be carried in the RRC establishment complete message, and may also be carried in other RRC messages.
  • the eighth indication information indicates that the terminal supports the second positioning type
  • the network device needs to locate the terminal, send a positioning request to the LMC.
  • the network device obtains the location information of the LMC through the above step 1003A or step 1102A.
  • the network device obtains the location information of the LMC through the above step 1003A or step 1102A.
  • the method further includes :
  • the terminal sends ninth indication information to the network device, where the ninth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal does not support the second positioning type.
  • the network device receives the ninth indication information from the terminal. In this case, the network device determines not to locate the terminal.
  • whether a terminal supports the second positioning type may be indicated by the core network for the terminal, or pre-configured in the terminal, or determined by the terminal itself.
  • the terminal indicates to the network device whether it supports the second positioning type, so that the network device can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate certain terminals, thereby solving the problem.
  • the network equipment that has not deployed LMC initiates the positioning problem.
  • each network element such as LMC, core network network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminal includes at least one of the corresponding hardware structures and software modules that perform each function. one.
  • LMC low-power mobile communications
  • core network network elements for example, SMF, AMF
  • network equipment and terminal includes at least one of the corresponding hardware structures and software modules that perform each function. one.
  • the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
  • the embodiments of the present application can divide functional units of LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals according to the foregoing method examples.
  • each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two Or two or more functions are integrated in one processing unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
  • FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the positioning device (denoted as the positioning device 140) involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the positioning device 140 includes a processing unit 1401 and a communication unit 1402.
  • a storage unit 1403 is further included.
  • the positioning device 140 may be used to illustrate the structure of the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processing unit 1401 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5.
  • the storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, ,
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to perform all the steps in Figure 5, 601, 602, and 605 in Figure 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704, and 705 in Figure 7, and 801, 802, and 805 in Figure 8, 901, 902, 902A, 902B, 904, and 905 in Figure 9, 1001, 1002, and 1005 in Figure 10, 1101, 1102, 1102A, 1102B, 1104, and 1105 in Figure 11, and 1202 and 1203 in Figure 12 (
  • the core network element is AMF
  • the processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5.
  • the storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device.
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG.
  • the network device is Any one of M5 network devices
  • 806 in Fig. 8 at this time, the network device is the second network device
  • 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • Any one 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time ,
  • the network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG.
  • the processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6.
  • the storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data of the network device.
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal.
  • the processing unit 1401 is used to execute 1201 in FIG. 12, 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12.
  • the storage unit 1403 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the positioning device 140 may be a device, a chip or a chip system.
  • the processing unit 1401 may be a processor; the communication unit 1402 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or an input interface and/or an output interface.
  • the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit.
  • the input interface may be an input circuit, and the output interface may be an output circuit.
  • the communication unit 1402 may be a communication interface, an input interface and/or an output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or related circuit on the chip or a chip system.
  • the processing unit 1401 may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
  • the integrated unit in FIG. 14 is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the medium includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks, etc., which can store program codes Medium.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a positioning device.
  • the positioning device includes a processor 1501, and optionally, a memory 1502 connected to the processor 1501.
  • the processor 1501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the execution of the program of this application. integrated circuit.
  • the processor 1501 may also include multiple CPUs, and the processor 1501 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor.
  • the processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
  • the memory 1502 may be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory).
  • read-only memory EEPROM
  • compact disc read-only memory, CD-ROM
  • optical disc storage including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.
  • magnetic disks A storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation on this.
  • the memory 1502 may exist independently (at this time, the processor may be located outside the positioning device, or may be located in the positioning device), or may be integrated with the processor 1501. Wherein, the memory 1502 may contain computer program code.
  • the processor 1501 is configured to execute the computer program code stored in the memory 1502, so as to implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the positioning device further includes a transceiver 1503.
  • the processor 1501, the memory 1502, and the transceiver 1503 are connected by a bus.
  • the transceiver 1503 is used to communicate with other devices or a communication network.
  • the transceiver 1503 may include a transmitter and a receiver.
  • the device used for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver 1503 can be regarded as a receiver, and the receiver is used to perform the receiving steps in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the device used in the transceiver 1503 to implement the sending function can be regarded as a transmitter, and the transmitter is used to perform the sending steps in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 may be used to illustrate the structures of the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals involved in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processor 1501 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, ,
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute all the steps in Fig. 5, 601, 602 and 605 in Fig. 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704 and 705 in Fig. 7, and 801, 802 and 805 in Fig.
  • the core network element is AMF
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the core network element.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device.
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG.
  • the network device is Any one of M5 network devices
  • 806 in Fig. 8 at this time, the network device is the second network device
  • 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • Any one 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time ,
  • the network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal.
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute 1201 and 1201 in FIG. 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the processor 1501 includes a logic circuit and at least one of an input interface and an output interface.
  • the output interface is used to execute the sending action in the corresponding method
  • the input interface is used to execute the receiving action in the corresponding method.
  • FIG. 16 The schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 can be used to illustrate the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals involved in the foregoing embodiment. structure.
  • core network elements for example, SMF, AMF
  • network equipment for example, SMF, AMF
  • terminals involved in the foregoing embodiment. structure for example, SMF, AMF
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processor 1501 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, ,
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute all the steps in Fig. 5, 601, 602 and 605 in Fig. 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704 and 705 in Fig. 7, and 801, 802 and 805 in Fig.
  • the core network element is AMF
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the core network element.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device.
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG.
  • the network device is Any one of M5 network devices
  • 806 in Fig. 8 at this time, the network device is the second network device
  • 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • the network device is one of the M6 network devices
  • Any one 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time ,
  • the network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
  • the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal.
  • the processor 1501 is used to execute 1201 and 1201 in FIG. 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application.
  • the processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12.
  • the memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • each step in the method provided in this embodiment can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including computer-executable instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the above-mentioned methods.
  • the embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which contains computer-executable instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the above-mentioned methods.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including any one or more of LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals.
  • LMC Long Term Evolution
  • core network elements for example, SMF, AMF
  • network equipment for example, SMF, AMF
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning device, including a processor and an interface, the processor is coupled with the memory through the interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or the computer execution instruction in the memory, any one of the above-mentioned embodiments provides This method is executed.
  • the above embodiments it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • a software program it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part.
  • the computer program product includes one or more computer instructions.
  • the computer program instructions When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part.
  • the computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices.
  • Computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium.
  • computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center through a cable (such as Coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or may include one or more data storage devices such as a server or a data center that can be integrated with the medium.
  • the usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).

Abstract

The present application relates to the technical field of communications, and provides a positioning method and apparatus. In the method, an LMC sends to a core network element a registration request used for requesting to register to the core network element, and the core network element sends a registration response, which comprises first indication information, to the LMC according to the registration request; the first indication information is used for indicating the positioning type supported by the LMC or is used for indicating whether the LMC supports a first positioning type. Thus, a core network indicates the positioning type supported by an LMC during the process of LMC registration so that a subsequent LMC can execute a corresponding positioning function.

Description

定位方法及装置Positioning method and device 技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种定位方法及装置。This application relates to the field of communication technology, and in particular to a positioning method and device.
背景技术Background technique
为了实现终端的定位,核心网中可以部署有定位管理功能(location management function,LMF)实体,LMF实体可以用于接收接入和移动性管理功能(access and mobility management function,AMF)实体的定位请求、决定定位测量所使用的方法(该决定可以基于终端和网络的能力,或者,基于定位请求中包含的信息等)、决定给终端定位的网络设备并向网络设备或者终端请求定位所需要的辅助信息、将定位所需要的辅助信息发送给终端或者网络设备、向终端或者网络设备请求测量信息、计算终端的位置等。In order to achieve terminal positioning, a location management function (LMF) entity can be deployed in the core network, and the LMF entity can be used to receive location requests from access and mobility management function (AMF) entities , Decide on the method used for positioning measurement (this decision can be based on the capabilities of the terminal and the network, or based on the information contained in the positioning request, etc.), determine the network device to locate the terminal, and request the network device or terminal for the assistance needed for positioning Information, sending auxiliary information required for positioning to the terminal or network device, requesting measurement information from the terminal or network device, calculating the location of the terminal, etc.
为了更加快速的对终端进行定位,LMF的部分或全部功能可以布置在网络设备,部署在网络设备上的LMF被称为本地LMF(local LMF,LLMF)或者定位管理组件(location management component,LMC)。LMC与核心网中的LMF共同存在。LMC在网络设备上不是必需,因此只会在一部分网络设备上部署。目前,LMC的功能具体如何实现是个亟待解决的问题。In order to locate the terminal more quickly, part or all of the functions of the LMF can be deployed on the network device. The LMF deployed on the network device is called a local LMF (local LMF, LLMF) or a location management component (location management component, LMC) . The LMC coexists with the LMF in the core network. LMC is not necessary on the network equipment, so it will only be deployed on a part of the network equipment. At present, how to implement the functions of LMC is an urgent problem to be solved.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种定位方法及装置,用于解决LMC的功能的实现问题。The embodiments of the present application provide a positioning method and device, which are used to solve the problem of implementing the function of the LMC.
为达到上述目的,本申请实施例提供如下技术方案:In order to achieve the foregoing objectives, the embodiments of the present application provide the following technical solutions:
第一方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC支持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC是否支持第一定位类型。根据第一方面提供的方法,在LMC注册的过程中,核心网可以指示LMC支持的定位类型,从而使得后续LMC可以执行相应的定位功能。In a first aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element Registration response, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type. According to the method provided in the first aspect, during the LMC registration process, the core network can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以支持多种定位类型,从而扩大了本申请的应用范围。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR. In this possible implementation, the LMC can support multiple positioning types, thereby expanding the scope of application of this application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。在该可能的实现方式中,LMF不支持新的定位类型RI-LR,而LMC可以支持RI-LR,通过对LMC进行RI-LR的定位类型的授权,可以使得LMC的功能在核心网的管辖范围内。In a possible implementation manner, the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR. In this possible implementation, LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC can support RI-LR. By authorizing the RI-LR positioning type for LMC, the function of LMC can be under the jurisdiction of the core network. Within range.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述核心网网元为AMF或LMF。In a possible implementation manner, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
第二方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述核心网网元向所述LMC发送注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC支 持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC是否支持第一定位类型。根据第二方面提供的方法,在LMC注册的过程中,核心网可以指示LMC支持的定位类型,从而使得后续LMC可以执行相应的定位功能。In a second aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a core network element receives a registration request from an LMC, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the core network element sends to the LMC Registration response, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type. According to the method provided in the second aspect, during the LMC registration process, the core network can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以支持多种定位类型,从而扩大了本申请的应用范围。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR. In this possible implementation, the LMC can support multiple positioning types, thereby expanding the scope of application of this application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。在该可能的实现方式中,LMF不支持新的定位类型RI-LR,而LMC可以支持RI-LR,通过对LMC进行RI-LR的定位类型的授权,可以使得LMC的功能在核心网的管辖范围内。In a possible implementation manner, the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR. In this possible implementation, LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC can support RI-LR. By authorizing the RI-LR positioning type for LMC, the function of LMC can be under the jurisdiction of the core network. Within range.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述核心网网元为AMF或LMF。In a possible implementation manner, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
第三方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的M1个网络设备的信息,M1为大于0的整数;所述LMC向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示与其对应的网络设备支持所述第二定位类型。根据第三方面提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a third aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element A registration response, where the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0; the LMC sends information to each of the M1 network devices Second indication information corresponding to each network device, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type. According to the method provided in the third aspect, by sending the second indication information to the network device supporting the second positioning type, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal, thereby solving the problem. The network equipment that deploys the LMC initiates the positioning problem.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M1 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的相关信息,M2为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以获取是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的网络设备的信息。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the M2 where the information of the second positioning type changes. Related information of a network device, M2 is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the network device whose information about the second positioning type has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为所述M2个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的网络设备是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second network device. Positioning type, the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第四方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从LMC接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述网络设备支持第二定位类型;在所述网络设备需要对服务的终端定位时,所述网络设备向所述LMC发送定位请求。根据第四方面提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC 的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a fourth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives second indication information from an LMC, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the network device supports a second positioning type; When locating the terminal, the network device sends a location request to the LMC. According to the method provided in the fourth aspect, by sending the second indication information to the network device supporting the second positioning type, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal, thereby solving the problem. The network equipment that deploys the LMC initiates the positioning problem.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的网络设备是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives third indication information from the LMC, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the network device supports the second positioning type . In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第五方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:核心网网元确定M3个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对应的网络设备支持第二定位类型,M3为大于0的整数;所述核心网网元向所述M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息。根据第五方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a fifth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a core network element determines second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type, and M3 is An integer greater than 0; the core network element sends the second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M3 network devices. According to the method provided in the fifth aspect, the core network element can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device supporting the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向所述M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为M4个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备,所述M4个网络设备为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的网络设备,M4为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的网络设备是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the core network element sending third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports all For the second positioning type, the first network device is any one of the M4 network devices, the M4 network devices are network devices that support changes in the information of the second positioning type, and M4 is greater than An integer of 0. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第六方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从核心网网元接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述网络设备支持第二定位类型;在所述网络设备需要对服务的终端定位时,所述网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。根据第六方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a sixth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives second indication information from a core network element, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the network device supports a second positioning type; When the service terminal needs to be located, the network device sends a location request to the LMC. According to the method provided by the sixth aspect, the core network element can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的网络设备是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the network device receives third indication information from the core network element, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the network device supports the first 2. Positioning type. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information of whether the network device in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第七方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的N1个小区的信息,所述N1个小区属于M5个网络设备,N1和M5均为大于0的整数;所述LMC向所述M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述第四指示信息对应的网络设备。根据第七方面提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a seventh aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; the LMC receives from the core network element A registration response, where the registration response includes information about N1 cells that support the second positioning type, the N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0; the LMC sends a message to the M5 Each of the network devices sends fourth indication information corresponding to each of the network devices, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the fourth The cell indicated by the indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information. According to the method provided in the seventh aspect, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate terminals in certain cells by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs. Position the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述注册响应中还包括所述M5个网络设备的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the registration response further includes information of the M5 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向所述M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M5 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的N2个小区的相关信息,N2为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以获取是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区的信息。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the N2 where the information of the second positioning type changes. The relevant information of each cell, N2 is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the cell whose information about the second positioning type changes.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为所述N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的小区是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports In the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第八方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从LMC接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述网络设备;在所述网络设备需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,所述网络设备向所述LMC发送定位请求。根据第八方面提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定 位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In an eighth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives fourth indication information from an LMC, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support a second positioning type, and the fourth indication information The indicated cell belongs to the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC. According to the method provided by the eighth aspect, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate terminals in certain cells by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs. Position the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N2个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N2为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的小区是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives fifth indication information from the LMC, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the network device supports the The second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells, the N2 cells are the cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N2 is an integer greater than 0 . In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第九方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:核心网网元确定M6个网络设备对应的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述第四指示信息对应的网络设备,M6为大于0的整数;所述核心网网元向所述M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第四指示信息。根据第九方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a ninth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a core network element determines fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, The cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network equipment corresponding to the fourth indication information, and M6 is an integer greater than 0; the core network element sends a connection to each of the M6 network equipments. The fourth indication information corresponding to each network device. According to the method provided in the ninth aspect, the core network element can authorize the network device to use the first method when it needs to locate the terminal in some cell by sending the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs. The second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向所述M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N3个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N3个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N3为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的小区是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the core network element sends fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate the first network device of the second network device. Whether the cell supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, the N3 cells are the cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, N3 Is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从核心网网元接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述网络设备;在所述网络设备需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,所述网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。根据第十方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端 进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a tenth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives fourth indication information from a core network element, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support a second positioning type, and the first 4. The cell indicated by the indication information belongs to the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC. According to the method provided by the tenth aspect, the core network element sends the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to use the first The second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N3个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N3个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N3为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的小区是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives fifth indication information from the core network element, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the network device is Supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N3 is greater than An integer of 0. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information about whether the cell in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十一方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的Q1个终端Q1个终端的信息,所述Q1个终端接入M7个网络设备,Q1和M7均为大于0的整数;所述LMC向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备。根据第十一方面提供的方法,LMC通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In an eleventh aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: an LMC sends a registration request to a core network element, where the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element; A registration response is received. The registration response includes information about Q1 terminals and Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type. The Q1 terminals access M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0; the LMC Send sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type , The one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information. According to the method provided by the eleventh aspect, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type when it needs to locate certain terminals by sending the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type. The terminal performs positioning, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述注册响应中还包括所述M7个网络设备的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M7 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q2个终端的相关信息,Q2为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以获取是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端的信息。In a possible implementation, the method further includes: the LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support Q2 when the information of the second positioning type changes. Related information of each terminal, Q2 is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC can obtain information about whether to support the terminal whose information of the second positioning type has changed.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述LMC向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为所述Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the LMC sends seventh indication information to a third network device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate a first terminal accessing the third network device Whether to support the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information of whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十二方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从LMC接收第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入所述网络设备;在所述网络设备需要对支持所述第二定位类型的终端定位时,所述网络设备向所述LMC发送定位请求。根据第十二方面提供的方法,LMC通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a twelfth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives sixth indication information from an LMC, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support a second positioning type, and the sixth indication The one or more terminals indicated by the information access the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC. According to the method provided in the twelfth aspect, the LMC sends the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate certain terminals. The terminal performs positioning, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述LMC接收第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q2个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q2为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,LMC可以更新网络设备中的终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives seventh indication information from the LMC, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the network device supports For the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of Q2 terminals, the Q2 terminals are terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, and Q2 is greater than 0 Integer. In this possible implementation manner, the LMC may update the information of whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends a positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十三方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:核心网网元确定M8个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备,M8为大于0的整数;所述核心网网元向所述M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息。根据第十三方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a thirteenth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a core network element determines sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type , The one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information, and M8 is an integer greater than 0; the core network element sends the message to the M8 network devices Each network device in sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device. According to the method provided by the thirteenth aspect, the core network element sends the sixth instruction information to the network device that supports the terminal of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second The positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向所述M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the core network element sending the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述核心网网元向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q3个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q3个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q3为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the core network element sending seventh indication information to a third network device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate the access to the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed , Q3 is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information about whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第六指示信息携带在初始上下文建立请求中。在 该可能的实现方式中,提供了一种第六指示信息的实现方法。In a possible implementation manner, the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request. In this possible implementation manner, a method for implementing the sixth indication information is provided.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述终端是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息为所述终端上报给所述核心网网元,或,所述终端是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息位于所述核心网网元存储的所述终端的签约信息中。在该可能的实现方式中,提供了两种核心网网元获取终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息的方法。In a possible implementation manner, whether the terminal supports the second positioning type information is reported by the terminal to the core network element, or whether the terminal supports the second positioning type information It is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored by the core network element. In this possible implementation manner, two methods are provided for the core network element to obtain information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type.
第十四方面,提供了一种定位方法,包括:网络设备从核心网网元接收第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入所述网络设备;在所述网络设备需要对支持所述第二定位类型的终端定位时,所述网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。根据第十四方面提供的方法,核心网网元通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In a fourteenth aspect, a positioning method is provided, including: a network device receives sixth indication information from a core network element, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support a second positioning type, and The one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device; when the network device needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC. According to the method provided by the fourteenth aspect, the core network element sends the sixth instruction information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second The positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。在该可能的实现方式中,可以使得网络设备获取LMC的位置,以便后续向LMC发起定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives the location information of the LMC from the core network element. In this possible implementation manner, the network device can be made to obtain the location of the LMC, so as to subsequently initiate a positioning request to the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述方法还包括:所述网络设备从所述核心网网元接收第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q3个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q3个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q3为大于0的整数。在该可能的实现方式中,核心网网元可以更新网络设备中的终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息,以便网络设备根据更新后的信息发送定位请求。In a possible implementation manner, the method further includes: the network device receives seventh indication information from the core network element, where the seventh indication information is used to instruct the first network device to access the network device. Whether the terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, Q3 Is an integer greater than 0. In this possible implementation manner, the core network element may update the information about whether the terminal in the network device supports the second positioning type, so that the network device sends the positioning request according to the updated information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第六指示信息携带在初始上下文建立请求中。在该可能的实现方式中,提供了一种第六指示信息的实现方法。In a possible implementation manner, the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request. In this possible implementation manner, a method for implementing the sixth indication information is provided.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十五方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述定位装置支持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述定位装置是否支持第一定位类型。In a fifteenth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to The core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used for Indicate the positioning type supported by the positioning device; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning device supports the first positioning type.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述定位装置支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning types supported by the positioning device include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述核心网网元为AMF或LMF。In a possible implementation manner, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
第十六方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元, 用于通过所述通信单元从LMC接收注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述定位装置;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述LMC发送注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC支持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC是否支持第一定位类型。In a sixteenth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive a registration request from the LMC through the communication unit, the registration request being used to request registration to the positioning The processing unit is further configured to send a registration response to the LMC through the communication unit, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the type of positioning supported by the LMC Or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述定位装置为AMF或LMF。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning device is AMF or LMF.
第十七方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的M1个网络设备的信息,M1为大于0的整数;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示与其对应的网络设备支持所述第二定位类型。In a seventeenth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to The core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, M1 is an integer greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send second indication information corresponding to each of the M1 network devices to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit, the The second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述定位装置的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning apparatus to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述定位装置的位置信息为所述定位装置所在的网络设备的标识或所述定位装置标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的相关信息,M2为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported Information about the changed M2 network devices, where M2 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为所述M2个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first network device through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports In the second positioning type, the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十八方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从LMC接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述定位装置支持第二定位类型;所述处理单元,还用于在所述定位装置需要对服务的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向所述LMC发送定位请求。In an eighteenth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive second indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the second indication information is used to indicate The positioning device supports the second positioning type; the processing unit is further configured to send a positioning request to the LMC through the communication unit when the positioning device needs to locate a terminal to be served.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的定位装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述定位装置是否支持所述第二定位类型。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive third indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning apparatus supports the first 2. Positioning type.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第十九方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于确定M3个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示对应的网络设备支持第二定位类型,M3为大于0的整数;所述通信单元,用于向所述M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送对应的第二指示信息。In a nineteenth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices, and the second indication information is used to indicate the corresponding The network device supports the second positioning type, and M3 is an integer greater than 0; the communication unit is configured to send corresponding second indication information to each of the M3 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元,还用于向所述M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元,还用于向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为M4个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备,所述M4个网络设备为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的网络设备,M4为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning Type, the first network device is any one of M4 network devices, the M4 network devices are network devices whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and M4 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从核心网网元接收第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示所述定位装置支持第二定位类型;所述处理单元,还用于在所述定位装置需要对服务的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向LMC发送定位请求。In a twentieth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive second indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, and the second indication information is used for Instructing the positioning device to support the second positioning type; the processing unit is further configured to send a positioning request to the LMC through the communication unit when the positioning device needs to locate the terminal to be served.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的定位装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述定位装置是否支持所述第二定位类型。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is configured to receive third indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the third indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning device supports The second positioning type.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十一方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的N1个小区的信息,所述N1个小区属于M5个网络设备,N1和M5均为大于0的整数;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述第四指示信息对应的网络设备。In a twenty-first aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration To the core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes information about N1 cells supporting the second positioning type, The N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send the data to each of the M5 network devices through the communication unit. The fourth indication information corresponding to each network device, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the fourth indication The network equipment corresponding to the information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述注册响应中还包括所述M5个网络设备的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the registration response further includes information of the M5 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述定位装置的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M5 network devices through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述定位装置的位置信息为所述定位装置所在的网络设备的标识或所述定位装置标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心 网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的N2个小区的相关信息,N2为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported Information about the N2 cells that have changed, where N2 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为所述N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send fifth instruction information to the second network device through the communication unit, and the fifth instruction information is used to indicate the second network device's Whether a cell supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十二方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从LMC接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述定位装置;所述处理单元,还用于在所述定位装置需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向所述LMC发送定位请求。In a twenty-second aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate Support one or more cells of the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the positioning apparatus; the processing unit is further configured to: When the terminal in the cell is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的定位装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a positioning device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述定位装置的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N2个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N2为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive fifth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the positioning device is The second positioning type is supported, the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells, the N2 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, and N2 is greater than An integer of 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十三方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于确定M6个网络设备对应的第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述第四指示信息对应的网络设备,M6为大于0的整数;所述通信单元,用于向所述M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送对应的第四指示信息。In a twenty-third aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices, and the fourth indication information is used to indicate support One or more cells of the second positioning type, the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information, and M6 is an integer greater than 0; the communication unit is configured to report to the M6 Each of the network devices sends corresponding fourth instruction information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元,还用于向所述M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述通信单元,还用于向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N3个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N3个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N3为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the communication unit is further configured to send fifth indication information to the second network device, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports all For the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N3 is greater than 0 Integer.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十四方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从核心网网元接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述通信装置;所述处理单元,还用于在所述通信装置需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向LMC发送定位请求。In a twenty-fourth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, the fourth indication information It is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the communication device; the processing unit is also used to indicate when the communication device needs to support the second positioning When a terminal in a cell of a positioning type is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的通信装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述通信装置的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N3个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N3个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N3为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive fifth indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the fifth indication information is used to indicate the second indication of the communication device. Whether a cell supports the second positioning type, the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells, and the N3 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type has changed, N3 is an integer greater than zero.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十五方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的Q1个终端的信息,所述Q1个终端接入M7个网络设备,Q1和M7均为大于0的整数;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备。In a twenty-fifth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration To the core network element; the processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, and the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type, The Q1 terminal accesses M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0; the processing unit is further configured to send data to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit. The sixth indication information corresponding to each network device, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information The terminal accesses the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述注册响应中还包括所述M7个网络设备的信息。In a possible implementation manner, the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述定位装置的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述定位装置的位置信息为所述定位装置所在的网络设备的标识或所述定位装置标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the positioning device is an identifier of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identifier of the positioning device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q2个终端的相关信息,Q2为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, and the update information is used to indicate whether the second positioning type information is supported The related information of Q2 terminals that have changed, Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为所述Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send seventh indication information to a third network device through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十六方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从LMC接收第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入所述通信装置;所述处理单元,还用于在所述通信装置需要对支持所述第二定位类型的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向所述LMC发送定位请求。In a twenty-sixth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive sixth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the sixth indication information is used to indicate Support one or more terminals of the second positioning type, the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the communication device; the processing unit is further configured to support the communication device when the communication device needs to support When the terminal of the second positioning type is positioned, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的通信装置的 标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述通信装置的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q2个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q2为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive seventh indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct the first communication device to access the communication device. Whether the terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals, and the Q2 terminals are the terminals whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, Q2 Is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十七方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元确定M8个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备,M8为大于0的整数;所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息。In a twenty-seventh aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to determine, through the communication unit, sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices, the sixth indication The information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information, and M8 is greater than 0 Integer; the processing unit is further configured to send the sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M8 network devices through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q3个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q3个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q3为大于0的整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to send seventh indication information to a third network device through the communication unit, and the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the third network device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are whether the information about whether to support the second positioning type changes Terminal, Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第六指示信息携带在初始上下文建立请求中。In a possible implementation manner, the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述终端是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息为所述终端上报给所述通信装置,或,所述终端是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息位于所述通信装置存储的所述终端的签约信息中。In a possible implementation, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is reported by the terminal to the communication device, or the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the In the contract information of the terminal stored in the communication device.
第二十八方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理单元和通信单元;所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从核心网网元接收第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入所述通信装置;所述处理单元,还用于在所述通信装置需要对支持所述第二定位类型的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向LMC发送定位请求。In a twenty-eighth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processing unit and a communication unit; the processing unit is configured to receive sixth indication information from a core network element through the communication unit, the sixth indication information It is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the communication device; the processing unit is also used to connect to the communication device When it is necessary to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, a positioning request is sent to the LMC through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收所述LMC的位置信息。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element through the communication unit.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的通信装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。In a possible implementation manner, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the communication device where the LMC is located or the identity of the LMC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述通信装置的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为Q3个终端中的任意一个或多个终端,所述Q3个终端为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的终端,Q3为大于0的 整数。In a possible implementation manner, the processing unit is further configured to receive seventh indication information from the core network element through the communication unit, where the seventh indication information is used to instruct to access the communication device Whether the first terminal supports the second positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals, and the Q3 terminals are whether the information about whether to support the second positioning type changes Terminal, Q3 is an integer greater than 0.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第六指示信息携带在初始上下文建立请求中。In a possible implementation manner, the sixth indication information is carried in the initial context establishment request.
在一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二定位类型为RI-LR。In a possible implementation manner, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
第二十九方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理器。处理器与存储器连接,存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,处理器执行存储器存储的计算机执行指令,从而实现第一方面至第十四方面中任一方面提供的任意一种方法。示例性的,存储器和处理器可以集成在一起,也可以为独立的器件。若为后者,存储器可以位于定位装置内,也可以位于定位装置外。In a twenty-ninth aspect, a positioning device is provided, including a processor. The processor is connected to the memory, and the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so as to implement any method provided in any one of the first aspect to the fourteenth aspect. Exemplarily, the memory and the processor may be integrated together, or may be independent devices. In the latter case, the memory may be located in the positioning device or outside the positioning device.
在一种可能的实现方式中,处理器包括逻辑电路,还包括输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个。示例性的,输出接口用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,输入接口用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a possible implementation manner, the processor includes a logic circuit, and also includes at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Exemplarily, the output interface is used to execute the sending action in the corresponding method, and the input interface is used to execute the receiving action in the corresponding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,定位装置还包括通信接口和通信总线,处理器、存储器和通信接口通过通信总线连接。通信接口用于执行相应方法中的收发的动作。通信接口也可以称为收发器。可选的,通信接口包括发送器和接收器中的至少一种,该情况下,发送器用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,接收器用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a possible implementation manner, the positioning device further includes a communication interface and a communication bus, and the processor, the memory, and the communication interface are connected through the communication bus. The communication interface is used to perform the sending and receiving actions in the corresponding method. The communication interface may also be called a transceiver. Optionally, the communication interface includes at least one of a transmitter and a receiver. In this case, the transmitter is used to perform the sending action in the corresponding method, and the receiver is used to perform the receiving action in the corresponding method.
在一种可能的实现方式中,定位装置以芯片的产品形态存在。In a possible implementation, the positioning device exists in the form of a chip product.
第三十方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括处理器、存储器以及存储在存储器上并在处理器上运行的计算机程序,当计算机程序被运行时,使得定位装置执行第一方面至第十四方面中的任意一个方面提供的任意一种方法。In a thirtieth aspect, a positioning device is provided, which includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and running on the processor. When the computer program is executed, the positioning device executes the first to fourteenth aspects. Any method provided by any one of the aspects.
第三十一方面,提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理器和接口,处理器通过接口与存储器耦合,当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或计算机执行指令时,使得第一方面至第十四方面中的任意一个方面提供的任意一种方法被执行。In a thirty-first aspect, a positioning device is provided, including: a processor and an interface, the processor is coupled with the memory through the interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or computer execution instruction in the memory, the first aspect to the tenth aspect are Any one of the methods provided by any one of the four aspects is executed.
第三十二方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机执行指令,当该计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面至第十四方面中任一方面提供的任意一种方法。In a thirty-second aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided, including computer-executable instructions. When the computer-executable instructions run on a computer, the computer executes any of the aspects provided in any one of the first to fourteenth aspects. a way.
第三十三方面,提供了一种计算机程序产品,包含计算机执行指令,当该计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行第一方面至第十四方面中任一方面提供的任意一种方法。In a thirty-third aspect, a computer program product is provided, including computer-executable instructions, which when the computer-executable instructions run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any one of the aspects provided in the first to fourteenth aspects method.
第十五方面至第三十三方面中的任一种实现方式所带来的技术效果可参见第一方面至第十四方面中对应实现方式所带来的技术效果,此处不再赘述。For the technical effects brought about by any one of the implementations of the fifteenth aspect to the thirty-third aspect, please refer to the technical effects brought about by the corresponding implementations of the first aspect to the fourteenth aspect, which will not be repeated here.
需要说明的是,在方案不矛盾的前提下,上述各个方面中的方案均可以结合。It should be noted that, provided that the solutions are not contradictory, the solutions in the above-mentioned aspects can be combined.
附图说明Description of the drawings
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种网络架构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of a network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图2为本申请实施例提供的又一种网络架构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图3为本申请实施例提供的又一种网络架构示意图;FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图4为本申请实施例提供的再一种网络架构示意图;FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of yet another network architecture provided by an embodiment of this application;
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 5 is a flowchart of a positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图6为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 6 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图7为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 7 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图8为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 8 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图9为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 9 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图10为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 10 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of the application;
图11为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 11 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图12为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 12 is a flowchart of another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图13为本申请实施例提供的再一种定位方法的流程图;FIG. 13 is a flowchart of still another positioning method provided by an embodiment of this application;
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种定位装置的组成示意图;14 is a schematic diagram of the composition of a positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种定位装置的硬件结构示意图;15 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application;
图16为本申请实施例提供的又一种定位装置的硬件结构示意图。FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of another positioning device provided by an embodiment of the application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
在本申请的描述中,除非另有说明,“/”表示“或”的意思,例如,A/B可以表示A或B。本文中的“和/或”仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B这三种情况。此外,“至少一个”是指一个或多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“第一”、“第二”等字样并不对数量和执行次序进行限定,并且“第一”、“第二”等字样也并不限定一定不同。In the description of this application, unless otherwise specified, "/" means "or". For example, A/B can mean A or B. "And/or" in this article is only an association relationship describing the associated objects, which means that there can be three kinds of relationships. For example, A and/or B can mean: A alone exists, A and B exist at the same time, and B exists alone. These three situations. In addition, "at least one" means one or more, and "plurality" means two or more. The words "first" and "second" do not limit the quantity and order of execution, and the words "first" and "second" do not limit the difference.
需要说明的是,本申请中,“示例性的”或者“例如”等词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例性的”或者“例如”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其他实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。确切而言,使用“示例性的”或者“例如”等词旨在以具体方式呈现相关概念。It should be noted that in this application, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to indicate examples, illustrations, or illustrations. Any embodiment or design solution described as "exemplary" or "for example" in this application should not be construed as being more preferable or advantageous than other embodiments or design solutions. To be precise, words such as "exemplary" or "for example" are used to present related concepts in a specific manner.
本申请实施例提供的方法可以应用于长期演进(long term evolution,LTE)系统、第五代(5th-generation,5G)系统、新无线(new radio,NR)系统,无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)系统以及未来演进系统或者多种通信融合系统。其中,5G系统可以为非独立组网(non-standalone,NSA)的5G系统或独立组网(standalone,SA)的5G系统。为了方便描述,本申请实施例中以提供的方法应用于5G系统或NR系统中为例对本申请实施例提供的方法作示例性说明。当本申请实施例提供的方法应用于其他系统中时,将本申请实施例中的网元替换为相应系统中的具备相同或相似功能的网元理解即可。The method provided in the embodiments of this application can be applied to long term evolution (LTE) systems, fifth-generation (5th-generation, 5G) systems, new radio (NR) systems, and wireless local area networks. , WLAN) system and future evolution system or a variety of communication integration systems. Among them, the 5G system can be a non-standalone (NSA) 5G system or a standalone (SA) 5G system. For ease of description, the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to a 5G system or an NR system as an example to illustrate the method provided in the embodiment of the present application. When the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applied to other systems, it is only necessary to replace the network element in the embodiment of the present application with a network element with the same or similar functions in the corresponding system.
5G系统或NR系统的接入网可以称为下一代(next generation,NG)-无线接入网(radio access network,RAN)。NG-RAN中可以包括一个或多个网络设备。网络设备为网络侧的一种用于发送信号,或者,接收信号,或者,发送信号和接收信号的实体,用于为终端提供无线通信功能。NG-RAN中包含的网络设备可以为下一代基站节点(next generation node base station,gNB)、下一代演进型基站(next generation evolved NodeB,ng-eNB)等。The access network of the 5G system or the NR system may be referred to as the next generation (NG)-radio access network (RAN). One or more network devices can be included in the NG-RAN. A network device is an entity on the network side that is used to send signals, or receive signals, or send signals and receive signals, and is used to provide wireless communication functions for the terminal. The network equipment included in the NG-RAN may be a next generation node base station (gNB), a next generation evolved NodeB (ng-eNB), and so on.
其中,网络设备可以为完整的实体,也可以为分离式架构。在分离式架构下,网络设备包括集中式单元(centralized unit,CU)和分布式单元(distributed unit,DU)。CU实现网络设备的部分功能,DU实现网络设备的部分功能。比如,CU负责处理非实时协议和服务,实现无线资源控制(radio resource control,RRC),分组数据汇聚层协议(packet data convergence protocol,PDCP)层的功能。DU负责处理物理层协议和实时服务,实现无线链路控制(radio link control,RLC)、媒体接入控制(media access control,MAC)和物理(physical,PHY)层的功能。进一步的,CU还可以是 用户面(User plane,UP)(本文中简称为CU-UP)和控制面(Control plane,CP)(本文中简称为CU-CP)分离的形态。Among them, the network device can be a complete entity or a separate architecture. Under the separated architecture, the network equipment includes a centralized unit (CU) and a distributed unit (DU). CU realizes part of the functions of network equipment, and DU realizes part of the functions of network equipment. For example, the CU is responsible for processing non-real-time protocols and services, and implements radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) layer functions. The DU is responsible for processing physical layer protocols and real-time services, and realizes the functions of radio link control (RLC), media access control (MAC) and physical (physical, PHY) layers. Further, the CU may also be in a form in which the user plane (UP) (referred to as CU-UP in this article) and the control plane (CP) (referred to as CU-CP in this article) are separated.
在5G系统或NR系统中,传统的定位架构可参见图1。NG-RAN中参与终端定位的网络设备包括gNB和ng-eNB。LMF和AMF位于核心网中。AMF为网络设备和核心网的接口,包括接入管理和移动性管理相关的功能,主要负责承担终端与LMF以及网络设备与LMF的定位相关消息的转发。LMF用于接收来自AMF的定位请求、决定定位测量所使用的方法(该决定可以基于终端和网络的能力,或者,基于定位请求中包含的信息等)、决定给终端定位的网络设备并向网络设备或者终端请求定位所需要的辅助信息、将定位所需要的辅助信息发送给终端或者网络设备、向终端或者网络设备请求测量信息、计算终端的位置等。各个网元之间的接口可参见图1,不再赘述。In a 5G system or NR system, the traditional positioning architecture can be seen in Figure 1. The network equipment involved in terminal positioning in NG-RAN includes gNB and ng-eNB. LMF and AMF are located in the core network. AMF is the interface between network equipment and core network, including access management and mobility management-related functions, and is mainly responsible for forwarding the positioning-related messages between the terminal and the LMF and the network equipment and the LMF. LMF is used to receive the positioning request from the AMF, determine the method used for positioning measurement (the decision can be based on the capabilities of the terminal and the network, or based on the information contained in the positioning request, etc.), determine the network device to locate the terminal and report it to the network The device or terminal requests auxiliary information required for positioning, sends the auxiliary information required for positioning to the terminal or network device, requests measurement information from the terminal or network device, calculates the position of the terminal, and so on. The interfaces between the various network elements can be seen in Figure 1, which will not be repeated here.
基于图1所示的定位架构,根据定位服务的发起者不同,目前有以下三种定位类型:Based on the positioning architecture shown in Figure 1, according to the originator of the positioning service, there are currently three types of positioning:
移动终端终止定位请求(mobile terminated location request,MT-LR):定位服务来自于核心网中的定位服务实体(例如,网关移动位置中心(gateway mobile location center,GMLC)),定位服务实体可以指定对某个终端进行定位。具体的,定位服务实体可以向AMF发送定位服务请求(location service request)(以下简称定位请求),AMF接收到定位请求之后再向LMF发送定位请求,LMF接收到定位请求之后发起并执行定位测量流程,通过定位测量流程获取定位测量信息,根据定位测量信息计算出终端的位置,并将终端的位置信息发送给AMF,进而由AMF发送给定位服务实体。Mobile terminal location request (MT-LR): The location service comes from a location service entity in the core network (for example, a gateway mobile location center (GMLC)). The location service entity can specify A certain terminal performs positioning. Specifically, the location service entity may send a location service request (hereinafter referred to as the location request) to the AMF. After the AMF receives the location request, it sends the location request to the LMF. After receiving the location request, the LMF initiates and executes the location measurement process , Obtain positioning measurement information through the positioning measurement process, calculate the position of the terminal according to the positioning measurement information, and send the position information of the terminal to the AMF, and then the AMF to the positioning service entity.
网络发起定位请求(network induced location request,NI-LR):定位服务来自于AMF,也就是运营商网络自己发起定位。具体的,若AMF需要终端的位置信息,向LMF发送定位请求,LMF接收到定位请求之后发起并执行定位测量流程,通过定位测量流程获取定位测量信息,根据定位测量信息计算出终端的位置,并将终端的位置信息发送给AMF。Network-induced location request (NI-LR): The location service comes from AMF, that is, the operator's network initiates the location itself. Specifically, if the AMF needs the location information of the terminal, it sends a location request to the LMF. After receiving the location request, the LMF initiates and executes the location measurement process, obtains the location measurement information through the location measurement process, calculates the location of the terminal based on the location measurement information, and Send the location information of the terminal to the AMF.
移动终端起源定位请求(mobile originated location request,MO-LR):定位服务来自于终端本身。由终端向AMF发送定位请求,AMF从LMF获得终端的位置信息(具体流程与MT-LR的具体实现流程类似,不再赘述),并将终端的位置信息发给终端。Mobile originated location request (MO-LR): The location service comes from the terminal itself. The terminal sends a location request to the AMF, and the AMF obtains the location information of the terminal from the LMF (the specific process is similar to the specific implementation process of MT-LR, and will not be repeated here), and sends the location information of the terminal to the terminal.
为了更加快速的对终端进行定位,如图2所示,可以在网络设备中部署LMC。该情况下,网络设备可以向部署的LMC直接发送定位请求,这与传统的定位架构中LMF所接收到的定位请求均来自于AMF有所不同。网络设备发送定位请求的定位类型可以称为无线接入网发起定位请求(RAN induced location request,RI-LR)。为了方便描述,本申请下文实施例中图6至图13所示的方案中以网络设备向LMC发送定位请求为例对本申请提供的方法进行说明,在实际实现时,网络设备也可以向AMF或LMF发送定位请求。In order to locate the terminal more quickly, as shown in Figure 2, the LMC can be deployed in the network equipment. In this case, the network device can directly send a positioning request to the deployed LMC, which is different from the positioning request received by the LMF in the traditional positioning architecture from the AMF. The location type of the location request sent by the network device may be referred to as a radio access network initiated location request (RAN induced location request, RI-LR). For ease of description, in the solutions shown in Figures 6 to 13 in the following embodiments of this application, the method provided by this application is described by taking the network device sending a location request to the LMC as an example. In actual implementation, the network device can also send a location request to the AMF or LMF sends a positioning request.
本申请实施例中,LMC可以部署在NG-RAN中,LMC在NG-RAN上的部署有如下三种可能方式:In the embodiment of this application, LMC can be deployed in NG-RAN, and there are three possible ways of deploying LMC on NG-RAN:
方式一:在网络设备为一个完整的实体的情况下,LMC部署于网络设备上,属于网络设备的功能模块,具体可参见图2。Method 1: In the case that the network device is a complete entity, the LMC is deployed on the network device and belongs to the functional module of the network device. Refer to Figure 2 for details.
方式二:在网络设备为分离式架构的情况下,LMC部署于网络设备上,并且LMC是一个独立的逻辑网元,并与所在的网络设备的CU(或网络设备的CU-CP)具有逻辑接口。如图3所示,图3中以LMC与所在的网络设备的CU具有逻辑接口为例进行 绘制。Method 2: In the case of a separate architecture of the network equipment, the LMC is deployed on the network equipment, and the LMC is an independent logical network element and has logic with the CU (or CU-CP of the network equipment) of the network equipment where it is located interface. As shown in Fig. 3, in Fig. 3, a logical interface between the LMC and the CU of the network device where it is located is taken as an example for drawing.
方式三:LMC是一个独立的逻辑网元,并与多个网络设备(或网络设备的CU或网络设备的CU-CP)相连。参见图4,图4中以LMC与多个网络设备相连为例进行绘制。Mode 3: The LMC is an independent logical network element and is connected to multiple network devices (or CU of the network device or CU-CP of the network device). Refer to Figure 4. In Figure 4, the LMC is connected to multiple network devices as an example for drawing.
需要说明的是,图2至图4所示的LMC的部署方式仅仅为示例性的,在实际实现时,参与终端定位的网络设备的个数可以更多,LMC的部署也不限于图中所示的位置,任意一种LMC的部署方式,本申请实施例提供的方法都可以适用。It should be noted that the deployment methods of LMC shown in Figures 2 to 4 are only exemplary. In actual implementation, the number of network devices participating in terminal positioning can be greater, and the deployment of LMCs is not limited to those shown in the figure. The position shown, any LMC deployment method, and the method provided in the embodiment of this application can be applicable.
需要说明的是,在本申请实施例中,图2至图4所示的架构中的LMC除了支持RI-LR之外,也可以支持NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR中的任意一种。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the LMC in the architecture shown in FIG. 2 to FIG. 4 can also support any one of NI-LR, MT-LR, and MO-LR in addition to supporting RI-LR. kind.
当LMC支持NI-LR,MT-LR或MO-LR时,AMF不向LMF发送定位请求,而是向LMC发送定位请求,LMC接收到定位请求之后发起并执行定位测量流程,通过定位测量流程获取定位测量信息,根据定位测量信息计算出终端的位置,并将终端的位置信息发送给AMF。When LMC supports NI-LR, MT-LR or MO-LR, AMF does not send a location request to LMF, but sends a location request to LMC. After receiving the location request, LMC initiates and executes the location measurement process, which is obtained through the location measurement process Position measurement information, calculate the position of the terminal according to the position measurement information, and send the position information of the terminal to the AMF.
目前,关于针对RI-LR的描述中,针对LMC支持的功能如何配置目前并没有解决方案。另外,核心网LMF并不支持网络设备直接向其发起定位,因此,针对未部署LMC的网络设备如何发起定位也没有解决方法。Currently, there is no solution for how to configure the functions supported by LMC in the description for RI-LR. In addition, the core network LMF does not support network devices directly initiating positioning to it. Therefore, there is no solution for how to initiate positioning for network devices that have not deployed LMC.
为了明确LMC具备哪些定位功能,本申请提供了一种定位方法,如图5所示,包括:In order to clarify which positioning functions the LMC has, this application provides a positioning method, as shown in Figure 5, including:
501、LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求。其中,注册请求用于请求注册到核心网网元。相应的,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求。501. The LMC sends a registration request to a core network element. Among them, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
其中,本申请各个实施例中,注册请求也可以称为LMC注册(LMC registration)消息。Among them, in each embodiment of the present application, the registration request may also be referred to as an LMC registration (LMC registration) message.
502、核心网网元向LMC发送注册响应。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收注册响应。502. The core network element sends a registration response to the LMC. Correspondingly, the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
其中,注册响应中包括第一指示信息,第一指示信息用于指示LMC支持的定位类型;或者,第一指示信息用于指示LMC是否支持第一定位类型。Wherein, the registration response includes first indication information, the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
其中,在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和LMC之间可以通过AMF交互信息。Among them, when the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF.
其中,本申请各个实施例中,注册响应也可以称为LMC注册确认(LMC registration ACK)消息。Among them, in each embodiment of the present application, the registration response may also be referred to as an LMC registration confirmation (LMC registration ACK) message.
可选的,LMC支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。Optionally, the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
第一指示信息可以直接指示LMC支持的定位类型。例如,第一指示信息可以为一个列表,列表中包括LMC支持的定位类型的信息。The first indication information may directly indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC. For example, the first indication information may be a list, and the list includes information about the positioning type supported by the LMC.
第一指示信息也可以为多个比特(bit),通过多个比特的值指示终端支持哪些定位类型。例如,多个比特可以为2个比特,当2个比特的值为00时,表示LMC支持NI-LR和MT-LR,当2个比特的值为10时,表示LMC支持MT-LR和MO-LR,当2个比特的值为01时,表示LMC支持MO-LR和RI-LR,当2个比特的值为11时,表 示LMC支持NI-LR和RI-LR。再例如,多个比特为4个比特,4个比特中每个比特对应一种定位类型,1个比特的值用于指示LMC是否支持对应的定位类型。示例性的,若第1个比特对应NI-LR,第2个比特对应MT-LR,第3个比特对应MO-LR,第4个比特对应RI-LR。假设1个比特的值为1时,表示LMC支持对应的定位类型。那么,当4个比特的值为0001,表示LMC支持RI-LR,不支持NI-LR、MT-LR和MO-LR。当4个比特的值为1110,表示LMC支持NI-LR、MT-LR和MO-LR,不支持RI-LR。The first indication information may also be multiple bits, and the value of the multiple bits is used to indicate which positioning types the terminal supports. For example, multiple bits can be 2 bits. When the value of 2 bits is 00, it means that LMC supports NI-LR and MT-LR. When the value of 2 bits is 10, it means that LMC supports MT-LR and MO. -LR, when the value of 2 bits is 01, it means that LMC supports MO-LR and RI-LR, and when the value of 2 bits is 11, it means that LMC supports NI-LR and RI-LR. For another example, the multiple bits are 4 bits, each of the 4 bits corresponds to a positioning type, and the value of 1 bit is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the corresponding positioning type. Exemplarily, if the first bit corresponds to NI-LR, the second bit corresponds to MT-LR, the third bit corresponds to MO-LR, and the fourth bit corresponds to RI-LR. Assuming that the value of 1 bit is 1, it means that the LMC supports the corresponding positioning type. Then, when the value of 4 bits is 0001, it means that LMC supports RI-LR, but does not support NI-LR, MT-LR, and MO-LR. When the value of 4 bits is 1110, it means that LMC supports NI-LR, MT-LR and MO-LR, but does not support RI-LR.
可选的,第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。Optionally, the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
针对每种定位类型,可以通过1个比特指示LMC是否支持该定位类型。例如,第一指示信息可以通过1个比特指示是否支持RI-LR,当该比特的值为0时,表示LMC不支持RI-LR,当该比特的值为1时,表示LMC支持RI-LR。反之亦可。For each positioning type, 1 bit can be used to indicate whether the LMC supports the positioning type. For example, the first indication information can indicate whether RI-LR is supported by 1 bit. When the value of this bit is 0, it means that LMC does not support RI-LR. When the value of this bit is 1, it means that LMC supports RI-LR. . The reverse is also possible.
图5所示的实施例提供的方法,在LMC注册的过程中,核心网网元可以指示LMC支持的定位类型,从而使得后续LMC可以执行相应的定位功能。另外,LMF不支持新的定位类型RI-LR,而LMC支持RI-LR,通过对LMC进行RI-LR的定位类型的授权,可以使得LMC的功能在核心网的管辖范围内。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 5, during the LMC registration process, the core network element can indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC, so that the subsequent LMC can perform the corresponding positioning function. In addition, LMF does not support the new positioning type RI-LR, while LMC supports RI-LR. By authorizing the RI-LR positioning type for the LMC, the function of the LMC can be within the jurisdiction of the core network.
为了解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题,本申请还提供了一种定位方法。该定位方法可以有几种实现方式,在实现方式1中,支持某种定位类型(记为第二定位类型)的网络设备可以对服务的所有终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。在实现方式2中,支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备可以对该小区内的所有终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。在实现方式3中,支持第二定位类型的终端接入的网络设备可以对该终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。以下对这三种实现方式的实现过程作具体阐述。In order to solve the problem of initiating positioning by network devices that have not deployed LMC, this application also provides a positioning method. The positioning method can be implemented in several ways. In the implementation manner 1, a network device that supports a certain positioning type (denoted as the second positioning type) can use the second positioning type for positioning of all terminals served. In the implementation manner 2, the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs can use the second positioning type to locate all terminals in the cell. In the implementation manner 3, a network device that supports access of a terminal of the second positioning type can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal. The following describes the implementation process of these three implementation methods in detail.
实现方式1:支持第二定位类型的网络设备可以对服务的所有终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。Implementation manner 1: A network device that supports the second positioning type can use the second positioning type for positioning of all terminals served.
在实现方式1下,LMC或核心网网元可以指示网络设备支持第二定位类型,以下通过场景1.1(LMC指示网络设备支持第二定位类型)和场景1.2(核心网网元指示网络设备支持第二定位类型)分别对本申请提供的定位方法进行阐述。In implementation 1, the LMC or the core network element can instruct the network device to support the second positioning type. The following uses scenario 1.1 (LMC indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type) and scenario 1.2 (the core network element indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type). Two positioning types) respectively describe the positioning methods provided in this application.
场景1.1、LMC指示网络设备支持第二定位类型。Scenario 1.1. The LMC indicates that the network device supports the second positioning type.
在场景1.1下,参见图6,该定位方法包括:In scenario 1.1, referring to Figure 6, the positioning method includes:
601、LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求。其中,注册请求用于请求注册到核心网网元。相应的,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求。601. The LMC sends a registration request to the core network element. Among them, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
602、核心网网元向LMC发送注册响应。其中,注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的M1个网络设备的信息,M1为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收注册响应。602. The core network element sends a registration response to the LMC. Wherein, the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
其中,在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和LMC之间可以通过AMF交互信息。网络设备的信息可以为网络设备的标识或网络设备的小区的信息(例如,小区标识)等。Among them, when the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF. The information of the network device may be the identity of the network device or the information of the cell of the network device (for example, the cell identity), and the like.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
需要说明的是,M1个网络设备的信息也可以通过核心网网元和LMC之间交互的 其他消息发送给LMC,例如,注册完成之后的消息(例如,现有的NG接口应用层协议(NG application protocol,NGAP)消息或者新定义的NGAP消息),不限于注册请求和注册响应。此处为了方便理解,采用注册请求和注册响应进行举例说明。It should be noted that the information of the M1 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NG interface application layer protocol (NG) The application protocol (NGAP) message or the newly defined NGAP message) is not limited to registration requests and registration responses. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
603、LMC向M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,第二指示信息用于指示与其对应的网络设备支持第二定位类型。相应的,M1个网络设备从LMC接收第二指示信息。603. The LMC sends second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M1 network devices, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type. Correspondingly, the M1 network devices receive the second indication information from the LMC.
示例性的,若M1=2,M1个网络设备分别为网络设备1和网络设备2,则LMC向网络设备1发送的第二指示信息用于指示网络设备1支持第二定位类型,LMC向网络设备2发送的第二指示信息用于指示网络设备2支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if M1=2 and the M1 network devices are network device 1 and network device 2, the second indication information sent by LMC to network device 1 is used to indicate that network device 1 supports the second positioning type, and LMC sends network device 1 and network device 2 respectively. The second indication information sent by the device 2 is used to indicate that the network device 2 supports the second positioning type.
其中,本申请各个实施例中,第二指示信息可以携带在现有的消息(例如,现有的Xn接口应用层协议(Xn application protocol,XnAP)消息)或新的消息(例如,LMC服务指示(LMC service indication)消息)。可选的,本申请各个实施例中,网络设备还可以回复一个针对现有的消息或新的消息的响应,其中,针对新的消息的响应可以称为LMC服务指示确认(LMC service indication ACK)消息。下文中的第三指示信息、第四指示信息、第五指示信息、第六指示信息和第七指示信息与第二指示信息类似,下文中不再赘述。需要说明的是,LMC服务指示消息和LMC服务指示确认消息仅仅是对新的消息的名称的举例,还可以是其他的名称,本申请不作限制。Among them, in each embodiment of the present application, the second indication information may be carried in an existing message (for example, an existing Xn interface application protocol (Xn application protocol, XnAP) message) or a new message (for example, LMC service indication (LMC service indication) message). Optionally, in each embodiment of the present application, the network device may also reply with a response to an existing message or a new message, where the response to the new message may be called LMC service indication ACK (LMC service indication ACK) information. The third indication information, the fourth indication information, the fifth indication information, the sixth indication information, and the seventh indication information in the following are similar to the second indication information, and will not be repeated hereafter. It should be noted that the LMC service indication message and the LMC service indication confirmation message are only examples of the name of the new message, and may also be other names, which are not limited in this application.
604、在M1个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对服务的终端定位时,该网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。604. When any one of the M1 network devices needs to locate the served terminal, the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图6,在步骤604之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 6, before step 604, the method further includes:
603A、LMC向M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M1个网络设备从LMC接收LMC的位置信息。603A. The LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M1 network devices. Correspondingly, M1 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
可选的,LMC的位置信息为LMC所在的网络设备的标识(此时,LMC部署在网络设备内)或LMC的标识(此时,LMC可以部署在网络设备内,也可以部署在网络设备外)。Optionally, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located (at this time, the LMC is deployed in the network device) or the identity of the LMC (at this time, the LMC can be deployed in the network device or outside the network device ).
第二指示信息和LMC的位置信息可以承载在相同的消息中,也可以承载在不同的消息中,本申请不作限制。The second indication information and the location information of the LMC may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
其中,网络设备在接收到LMC的位置信息后,在需要对服务的终端定位时,即可确定向哪个设备发送定位请求。需要说明的是,LMC的位置信息也可以不是LMC发送给网络设备,而是预先配置在各个网络设备中,本申请不作限制。Among them, after receiving the location information of the LMC, the network device can determine which device to send the location request to when it needs to locate the terminal to be served. It should be noted that the location information of the LMC may not be sent by the LMC to the network device, but may be pre-configured in each network device, which is not limited in this application.
可选的,参见图6,在步骤602之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 6, after step 602, the method further includes:
605、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的相关信息,M2为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。605. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support relevant information of M2 network devices whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and M2 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
本申请各个实施例中,更新信息可以携带在现有的消息或新的消息(例如,LMC功能更新(LMC function update)消息)中。与LMC服务指示消息和LMC服务指示确认消息类似的,LMC功能更新消息只是对新的消息的名称的举例,还可以是其他的名称,本申请不作限制。In the various embodiments of the present application, the update information may be carried in an existing message or a new message (for example, an LMC function update message). Similar to the LMC service indication message and the LMC service indication confirmation message, the LMC function update message is only an example of the name of the new message, and may also be other names, which is not limited in this application.
在第一种情况下,更新信息为更新后的支持第二定位类型的网络设备的信息(例 如,网络设备的标识)。该情况下,LMC通过对比更新前和更新后支持第二定位类型的网络设备,可以确定哪些网络设备从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,哪些网络设备从不支持第二定位类型,变为了支持第二定位类型。In the first case, the updated information is the updated information of the network device supporting the second positioning type (for example, the identification of the network device). In this case, by comparing the network devices that support the second positioning type before and after the update, LMC can determine which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have never supported the second positioning type. The type has changed to support the second positioning type.
示例性的,参见表1,若更新前支持第二定位类型的网络设备包括网络设备1和网络设备2,更新后支持第二定位类型的网络设备包括网络设备1和网络设备3,则LMC可以确定网络设备2从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,网络设备3从不支持第二定位类型,变为了支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, referring to Table 1, if the network equipment supporting the second positioning type before the update includes network equipment 1 and network equipment 2, and the network equipment supporting the second positioning type includes network equipment 1 and network equipment 3 after the update, the LMC can It is determined that the network device 2 has changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and the network device 3 has never supported the second positioning type but has changed to supporting the second positioning type.
表1Table 1
更新前支持第二定位类型的网络设备Network equipment supporting the second positioning type before the update 更新后支持第二定位类型的网络设备Network devices that support the second positioning type after the update
网络设备1Network equipment 1 网络设备1Network equipment 1
网络设备2Network equipment 2 网络设备3Network equipment 3
在第二种情况下,更新信息为支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的信息(例如,网络设备的标识),LMC根据更新前支持第二定位类型的网络设备和更新信息确定哪些网络设备从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,哪些网络设备从不支持第二定位类型变为了支持第二定位类型。In the second case, the update information is the information of the M2 network devices that support the second positioning type information (for example, the identification of the network device), and the LMC will update the information according to the network devices that support the second positioning type before the update. Determine which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type.
示例性的,参见表2,若更新前支持第二定位类型的网络设备包括网络设备1和网络设备2,支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备为网络设备1和网络设备3,则LMC可以确定网络设备2从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,网络设备3从不支持第二定位类型,变为了支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, refer to Table 2. If the network devices that support the second positioning type before the update include network device 1 and network device 2, the M2 network devices that support the change in the information of the second positioning type are network device 1 and network device 3. , The LMC can determine that the network device 2 has changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and that the network device 3 has never supported the second positioning type but has changed to supporting the second positioning type.
表2
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000001
Table 2
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000001
在第三种情况下,更新信息为从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型的网络设备的信息(例如,网络设备的标识),以及从不支持第二定位类型变为了支持第二定位类型的网络设备的信息(例如,网络设备的标识)。或者说,更新信息为支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的信息,以及是否支持第二定位类型的变化信息(具体为哪些网络设备从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型和哪些网络设备从不支持第二定位类型变为了支持第二定位类型的信息)。该情况下,LMC可以直接根据更新信息确定哪些网络设备从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,哪些网络设备从不支持第二定位类型,变为了支持第二定位类型。In the third case, the updated information is the information of the network device that does not support the second positioning type from supporting the second positioning type (for example, the identification of the network device), and the information is changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the first positioning type. 2. Information of the network device of the positioning type (for example, the identification of the network device). In other words, the update information is the information of the M2 network devices that support the change in the information of the second positioning type, and whether the change information of the second positioning type is supported (specifically which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the first positioning type). The second positioning type and which network devices have changed from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type). In this case, the LMC can directly determine according to the update information which network devices have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and which network devices have never supported the second positioning type but have changed to supporting the second positioning type.
示例性的,更新信息可参见表3,根据表3,LMC可以确定网络设备1和网络设备2从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,网络设备3和网络设备4从不支持第二定位类型变为了支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, the update information can be found in Table 3. According to Table 3, LMC can determine that network device 1 and network device 2 have changed from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, and network device 3 and network device 4 never support The second positioning type has changed to support the second positioning type.
表3table 3
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2020088447-appb-000003
步骤605和步骤603以及步骤604的执行顺序不分先后。Step 605, step 603, and step 604 are executed in no particular order.
可选的,在步骤605之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, after step 605, the method further includes:
606、LMC向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,第三指示信息用于指示第一网络设备是否支持第二定位类型,第一网络设备为M2个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。相应的,第一网络设备从LMC接收第三指示信息。606. The LMC sends third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the first network device is any one of the M2 network devices. Correspondingly, the first network device receives the third indication information from the LMC.
具体的,若第一网络设备从支持第二定位类型变为不支持第二定位类型,第三指示信息具体用于指示第一网络设备不支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一网络设备属于M1个网络设备,在后续过程中,第一网络设备不向LMC发送定位请求。若第一网络设备从不支持第二定位类型变为支持第二定位类型,第三指示信息具体用于指示第一网络设备支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一网络设备不属于M1个网络设备,在后续过程中,在第一网络设备需要对服务的终端定位时,向LMC发送定位请求。Specifically, if the first network device changes from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, the third indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first network device does not support the second positioning type. In this case, the first network device It belongs to the M1 network device, and in the subsequent process, the first network device does not send a positioning request to the LMC. If the first network device changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type, the third indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first network device supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first network device does not belong to M1 In the subsequent process, the network device sends a location request to the LMC when the first network device needs to locate the terminal to be served.
图6所示的实施例提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 6, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal by sending the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type. In this way, the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC is solved.
场景1.2、核心网网元指示网络设备支持第二定位类型。Scenario 1.2: The core network element instructs the network device to support the second positioning type.
在场景1.2下,参见图7,该定位方法包括:In scenario 1.2, referring to Figure 7, the positioning method includes:
701、核心网网元确定M3个网络设备对应的第二指示信息。其中,第二指示信息用于指示对应的网络设备支持第二定位类型。701. The core network element determines second indication information corresponding to M3 network devices. The second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
702、核心网网元向M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息。相应的,M3个网络设备从核心网网元接收第二指示信息。M3为大于0的整数。702. The core network element sends second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M3 network devices. Correspondingly, the M3 network devices receive the second indication information from the core network element. M3 is an integer greater than zero.
示例性的,若M3=2,M3个网络设备分别为网络设备1和网络设备2,则核心网网元向网络设备1发送的第二指示信息用于指示网络设备1支持第二定位类型,核心网网元向网络设备2发送的第二指示信息用于指示网络设备2支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if M3=2 and the M3 network devices are network device 1 and network device 2, the second indication information sent by the core network element to network device 1 is used to indicate that network device 1 supports the second positioning type. The second indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that the network device 2 supports the second positioning type.
在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和网络设备之间可以通过AMF交互信息。When the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
其中,第二指示信息可以携带在AMF和网络设备之间交互的现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新(AMF Configuation Update)消息)或新的NGAP消息中。The second indication information may be carried in an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF Configuration Update (AMF Configuration Update) message) or a new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
703、在M3个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对服务的终端定位时,该网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。703. When any one of the M3 network devices needs to locate the served terminal, the network device sends a location request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图7,在步骤703之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 7, before step 703, the method further includes:
702A、核心网网元向M3个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M3个网络设备从核心网网元接收LMC的位置信息。702A. The core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M3 network devices. Correspondingly, the M3 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network network element.
可选的,LMC的位置信息为LMC所在的网络设备的标识(此时,LMC部署在网络设备内)或LMC的标识(此时,LMC可以部署在网络设备内,也可以部署在网络 设备外)。Optionally, the location information of the LMC is the identity of the network device where the LMC is located (at this time, the LMC is deployed in the network device) or the identity of the LMC (at this time, the LMC can be deployed in the network device or outside the network device ).
第二指示信息和LMC的位置信息可以承载在相同的消息中,也可以承载在不同的消息中,本申请不作限制。The second indication information and the location information of the LMC may be carried in the same message or in different messages, which is not limited in this application.
其中,网络设备在接收到LMC的位置信息后,在需要对服务的终端定位时,即可确定向哪个设备发送定位请求。需要说明的是,LMC的位置信息也可以不是核心网网元发送给网络设备,而是预先配置在各个网络设备中,本申请不作限制。Among them, after receiving the location information of the LMC, the network device can determine which device to send the location request to when it needs to locate the terminal to be served. It should be noted that the location information of the LMC may not be sent to the network device by the core network element, but is pre-configured in each network device, which is not limited in this application.
可选的,参见图7,在步骤703之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 7, before step 703, the method further includes:
702B、核心网网元向LMC发送支持第二定位类型的M3个网络设备的信息。702B. The core network element sends the information of the M3 network devices supporting the second positioning type to the LMC.
该情况下,LMC可以仅处理M3个网络设备发送的定位请求,其他网络设备发送的定位请求,LMC不处理。In this case, the LMC can only process the positioning requests sent by M3 network devices, and the LMC does not process the positioning requests sent by other network devices.
步骤702B在具体实现时,LMC可以向核心网网元发送注册请求,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求,并向LMC发送注册响应,注册响应中可以包括支持第二定位类型的M3个网络设备的信息。When step 702B is specifically implemented, the LMC may send a registration request to the core network element. The core network element receives the registration request from the LMC and sends a registration response to the LMC. The registration response may include M3 network devices that support the second positioning type. Information.
当然,M3个网络设备的信息也可以通过核心网网元和LMC之间交互的其他消息发送给LMC,例如,注册完成之后的消息(例如,现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新消息)或新的NGAP消息中),不限于注册请求和注册响应。此处为了方便理解,采用注册请求和注册响应进行举例说明。Of course, the information of the M3 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, a message after the registration is completed (for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message), not limited to registration requests and registration responses. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
步骤702、步骤702A和步骤702B的执行顺序不分先后。Step 702, step 702A, and step 702B are executed in no particular order.
可选的,参见图7,在步骤703之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 7, after step 703, the method further includes:
704、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M4个网络设备的相关信息,M4为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。704. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the M4 network devices whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and M4 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
步骤704的具体实现与上述步骤605类似,可参照进行理解,不再赘述。The specific implementation of step 704 is similar to the above step 605, which can be understood by referring to it, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,在步骤703之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, after step 703, the method further includes:
705、核心网网元向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息。其中,第三指示信息用于指示第一网络设备是否支持第二定位类型,第一网络设备为M4个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。相应的,第一网络设备从核心网网元接收第三指示信息。705. The core network element sends third indication information to the first network device. The third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the first network device is any one of the M4 network devices. Correspondingly, the first network device receives the third indication information from the core network element.
关于第三指示信息的描述可参见上述场景1.1,不再赘述。步骤705与步骤704的执行顺序不分先后。For the description of the third indication information, refer to the above scenario 1.1, which will not be repeated. Step 705 and step 704 are executed in no particular order.
图7所示的实施例提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的网络设备发送第二指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 7, the core network element sends the second indication information to the network device that supports the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate the terminal. Perform positioning to solve the problem of positioning initiated by network devices that have not deployed LMC.
实现方式2:支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备可以对该小区内的所有终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。Implementation manner 2: The network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs can use the second positioning type to locate all terminals in the cell.
在实现方式2下,LMC或核心网网元可以向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的小区,以下通过场景2.1(LMC向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的小区)和场景2.2(核心网网元向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的小区)分别对本申请提供的定位方法进行阐述。In implementation 2, the LMC or the core network element can indicate to the network device the cell that supports the second positioning type. The following uses scenario 2.1 (LMC indicates the cell that supports the second positioning type to the network device) and scenario 2.2 (core network network The element instructs the network equipment to support the cells of the second positioning type) respectively to explain the positioning methods provided in this application.
场景2.1、LMC向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的小区。Scenario 2.1: The LMC indicates to the network device a cell that supports the second positioning type.
在场景2.1下,参见图8,该定位方法包括:In scenario 2.1, referring to Figure 8, the positioning method includes:
801、LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求。其中,注册请求用于请求注册到核心网网元。相应的,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求。801. The LMC sends a registration request to the core network element. Among them, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
802、核心网网元向LMC发送注册响应。其中,注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的N1个小区的信息,N1个小区属于M5个网络设备,N1和M5均为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收注册响应。802. The core network element sends a registration response to the LMC. Wherein, the registration response includes information about N1 cells supporting the second positioning type, N1 cells belong to M5 network devices, and both N1 and M5 are integers greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
本申请各个实施例中,一个小区属于一个网络设备可以理解为该网络设备支持该小区。In the various embodiments of the present application, a cell belonging to one network device can be understood as the network device supporting the cell.
可选的,注册响应中还包括M5个网络设备的信息。M5个网络设备与N1个小区具有对应关系,LMC可以根据该对应关系确定N1个小区中的任意一个小区所属的网络设备。Optionally, the registration response also includes information about M5 network devices. The M5 network devices have a corresponding relationship with the N1 cells, and the LMC can determine the network device to which any one of the N1 cells belongs according to the corresponding relationship.
其中,在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和LMC之间可以通过AMF交互信息。小区的信息可以为小区标识等。Among them, when the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF. The information of the cell may be a cell identity or the like.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
需要说明的是,N1个小区的信息也可以通过核心网网元和LMC之间交互的其他消息发送给LMC,例如,注册完成之后的消息(例如,现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新消息)或新的NGAP消息中),不限于注册请求和注册响应。此处为了方便理解,采用注册请求和注册响应进行举例说明。It should be noted that the information of the N1 cells can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NGAP message (for example, AMF configuration update) Message) or new NGAP message), not limited to registration request and registration response. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
803、LMC向M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第四指示信息。其中,第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,第四指示信息指示的小区属于第四指示信息对应的网络设备。相应的,M5个网络设备从LMC接收第四指示信息。803. The LMC sends fourth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M5 network devices. The fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information. Correspondingly, the M5 network devices receive the fourth indication information from the LMC.
示例性的,若N1=3,N1个小区分别为小区1、小区2和小区3,小区1和小区2属于网络设备1,小区3属于网络设备2,则LMC向网络设备1发送的第四指示信息用于指示小区1和小区2支持第二定位类型,LMC向网络设备2发送的第四指示信息用于指示小区3支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if N1=3, the N1 cells are cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3, cell 1 and cell 2 belong to network equipment 1, and cell 3 belongs to network equipment 2, then the fourth LMC sends to network equipment 1. The indication information is used to indicate that cell 1 and cell 2 support the second positioning type, and the fourth indication information sent by the LMC to the network device 2 is used to indicate that cell 3 supports the second positioning type.
804、在M5个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对支持第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,该网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。804. When any one of the M5 network devices needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图8,在步骤804之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 8, before step 804, the method further includes:
803A、LMC向M5个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M5个网络设备从LMC接收LMC的位置信息。803A. The LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M5 network devices. Correspondingly, M5 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
与步骤803A相关的描述可参见上述步骤603A,不再赘述。For descriptions related to step 803A, refer to the above step 603A, which will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图8,在步骤802之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 8, after step 802, the method further includes:
805、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的N2个小区的相关信息,N2为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。805. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the N2 cells where the information of the second positioning type is changed, and N2 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
步骤805的具体实现与步骤605类似,区别仅在于此处支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的为小区的信息,而不是网络设备的信息,具体可参照步骤605的相关描述 进行理解,具体的,将M2个网络设备替换为N2个小区进行理解即可,不再赘述。The specific implementation of step 805 is similar to step 605. The only difference is that the information that supports the second positioning type changes here is the information of the cell, not the information of the network device. For details, please refer to the relevant description of step 605 for understanding. , Replace M2 network devices with N2 cells for understanding, so I won’t repeat them here.
步骤805和步骤803以及步骤804的执行顺序不分先后。Step 805, step 803, and step 804 are executed in no particular order.
可选的,在步骤805之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, after step 805, the method further includes:
806、LMC向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息。其中,第五指示信息用于指示第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持第二定位类型,第一小区为N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区。相应的,第二网络设备从LMC接收第五指示信息。806. The LMC sends fifth indication information to the second network device. The fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports the second positioning type, and the first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells. Correspondingly, the second network device receives the fifth indication information from the LMC.
具体的,若第一小区从支持第二定位类型变为不支持第二定位类型,第五指示信息具体用于指示第一小区不支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一小区属于N1个小区,在后续过程中,第二网络设备确定不对第一小区中的终端进行定位。若第一小区从不支持第二定位类型变为支持第二定位类型,第五指示信息具体用于指示第一小区支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一小区不属于N1个小区,在后续过程中,在第二网络设备需要对第一小区中的终端进行定位时,向LMC发送定位请求。Specifically, if the first cell changes from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, the fifth indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first cell does not support the second positioning type. In this case, the first cell belongs to N1 In the cell, in the subsequent process, the second network device determines not to locate the terminal in the first cell. If the first cell changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type, the fifth indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first cell supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first cell does not belong to N1 cells. In the subsequent process, when the second network device needs to locate the terminal in the first cell, it sends a positioning request to the LMC.
图8所示的实施例提供的方法,LMC通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 8, the LMC sends fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to use the first The second positioning type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
场景2.2、核心网网元向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的小区。Scenario 2.2: The core network element instructs the network device to support the cell of the second positioning type.
在场景2.2下,参见图9,该定位方法包括:In scenario 2.2, referring to Figure 9, the positioning method includes:
901、核心网网元确定M6个网络设备对应的第四指示信息。其中,第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,第四指示信息指示的小区属于第四指示信息对应的网络设备。M6为大于0的整数。901. The core network element determines fourth indication information corresponding to M6 network devices. The fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device corresponding to the fourth indication information. M6 is an integer greater than zero.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
902、核心网网元向M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第四指示信息。相应的,网络设备从核心网网元接收第四指示信息。902. The core network element sends fourth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M6 network devices. Correspondingly, the network device receives the fourth indication information from the core network element.
示例性的,若第四指示信息指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区为小区1、小区2和小区3,小区1和小区2属于网络设备1,小区3属于网络设备2,则核心网网元向网络设备1发送的第四指示信息用于指示小区1和小区2支持第二定位类型,核心网网元向网络设备2发送的第四指示信息用于指示小区3支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if the fourth indication information indicates that one or more cells supporting the second positioning type are cell 1, cell 2, and cell 3, cell 1 and cell 2 belong to network device 1, and cell 3 belongs to network device 2, then the core The fourth indication information sent by the network element to the network device 1 is used to indicate that cell 1 and cell 2 support the second positioning type, and the fourth indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that cell 3 supports the second positioning type. type.
在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和网络设备之间可以通过AMF交互信息。When the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
其中,第四指示信息可以携带在AMF和网络设备之间交互的现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新消息)或新的NGAP消息中。Wherein, the fourth indication information may be carried in an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) or a new NGAP message that is exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
903、在M6个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对支持第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,该网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。903. When any one of the M6 network devices needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图9,在步骤903之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 9, before step 903, the method further includes:
902A、核心网网元向M6个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M6个网络设备从核心网网元接收LMC的位置信息。902A. The core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M6 network devices. Correspondingly, the M6 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network element.
与步骤902A相关的描述可参见上述步骤702A,不再赘述。For descriptions related to step 902A, refer to the above step 702A, which will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图9,在步骤903之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 9, before step 903, the method further includes:
902B、核心网网元向LMC发送M6个网络设备的信息。902B. The core network element sends information about M6 network devices to the LMC.
该情况下,LMC可以仅处理M6个网络设备发送的定位请求,其他网络设备发送的定位请求,LMC不处理。In this case, the LMC can only process the location requests sent by M6 network devices, and the LMC does not process location requests sent by other network devices.
步骤902B在具体实现时,LMC可以向核心网网元发送注册请求,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求,并向LMC发送注册响应,注册响应中可以包括M6个网络设备的信息。When step 902B is specifically implemented, the LMC may send a registration request to the core network element. The core network element receives the registration request from the LMC and sends a registration response to the LMC. The registration response may include information about M6 network devices.
当然,M6个网络设备的信息也可以通过核心网网元和LMC之间交互的其他消息发送给LMC,例如,注册完成之后的消息(例如,现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新消息)或新的NGAP消息中),不限于注册请求和注册响应。此处为了方便理解,采用注册请求和注册响应进行举例说明。Of course, the information of the M6 network devices can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, a message after the registration is completed (for example, an existing NGAP message (for example, an AMF configuration update message) Or in a new NGAP message), not limited to registration requests and registration responses. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
步骤902、步骤902A和步骤902B的执行顺序不分先后。Step 902, step 902A, and step 902B are executed in no particular order.
可选的,参见图9,在步骤903之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 9, after step 903, the method further includes:
904、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的N3个小区的相关信息,N3为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。904. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of the N3 cells where the information of the second positioning type is changed, and N3 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
步骤904的具体实现与上述步骤805类似,可参照进行理解,不再赘述。The specific implementation of step 904 is similar to the above step 805, which can be understood by reference, and will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图9,在步骤903之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 9, after step 903, the method further includes:
905、核心网网元向第二网络设备发送第五指示信息。其中,第五指示信息用于指示第二网络设备的第一小区是否支持第二定位类型,第一小区为N3个小区中的任意一个或多个小区。相应的,第二网络设备从核心网网元接收第五指示信息。905. The core network element sends fifth indication information to the second network device. The fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the second network device supports the second positioning type, and the first cell is any one or more of the N3 cells. Correspondingly, the second network device receives the fifth indication information from the core network element.
关于第五指示信息的描述可参见上述场景2.1,不再赘述。For the description of the fifth indication information, refer to the above scenario 2.1, which will not be repeated.
图9所示的实施例提供的方法,核心网网元通过向支持第二定位类型的小区所属的网络设备发送第四指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些小区中的终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 9, the core network element sends the fourth indication information to the network device to which the cell supporting the second positioning type belongs, and can authorize the network device to locate the terminal in certain cells. , Use the second positioning type to locate the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
实现方式3:支持第二定位类型的终端接入的网络设备可以对该终端采用第二定位类型进行定位。Implementation manner 3: The network device that supports the access of the terminal of the second positioning type can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal.
在实现方式3下,LMC或核心网网元可以向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端,或终端向网络设备指示自身是否支持第二定位类型,以下通过场景3.1(LMC向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端)、场景3.2(核心网网元向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端)和场景3.3(终端向网络设备指示是否支持第二定位类型)分别对本申请提供的定位方法进行阐述。In implementation mode 3, the LMC or the core network element can indicate to the network device the terminal that supports the second positioning type, or the terminal indicates to the network device whether it supports the second positioning type, the following scenario 3.1 (LMC indicates support to the network device The second positioning type terminal), scenario 3.2 (the core network element instructs the network device to support the terminal of the second positioning type) and scenario 3.3 (the terminal indicates to the network device whether to support the second positioning type) the positioning methods provided in this application respectively Explain.
场景3.1、LMC向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端。Scenario 3.1: The LMC indicates to the network device a terminal that supports the second positioning type.
在场景3.1下,参见图10,该定位方法包括:In scenario 3.1, referring to Figure 10, the positioning method includes:
1001、LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求。其中,注册请求用于请求注册到核心网网元。相应的,核心网网元从LMC接收注册请求。1001. The LMC sends a registration request to a core network element. Among them, the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element. Correspondingly, the core network element receives the registration request from the LMC.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
1002、核心网网元向LMC发送注册响应。其中,注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的Q1个终端的信息,Q1个终端接入M7个网络设备,Q1和M7均为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收注册响应。1002. The core network element sends a registration response to the LMC. Wherein, the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type, Q1 terminals access M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are integers greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives a registration response from the core network element.
可选的,注册响应中还包括M7个网络设备的信息。M7个网络设备与Q1个终端具有对应关系,LMC可以根据该对应关系确定Q1个终端中的任意一个终端接入的网络设备。Optionally, the registration response also includes information about M7 network devices. The M7 network devices have a corresponding relationship with the Q1 terminals, and the LMC can determine the network device accessed by any one of the Q1 terminals according to the corresponding relationship.
可选的,在一种情况下,终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息为终端上报给核心网网元的。示例性的,终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息可以携带在RRC建立完成(RRCsetupComplete)消息中(此时,核心网网元为AMF),也可以携带在终端向LMF发送的用于终端能力上报的LTE定位协议(LTE positioning protocol,LPP)消息中(此时,核心网网元为LMF),还可以携带在其他消息中,本申请不作限制。在另一种情况下,终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息位于核心网网元存储的终端的签约信息中。Optionally, in one case, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is reported by the terminal to the core network element. Exemplarily, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type can be carried in the RRC setup complete (RRCsetupComplete) message (at this time, the core network element is AMF), or it can be carried in the terminal capability report sent by the terminal to the LMF The LTE positioning protocol (LTE positioning protocol, LPP) message (at this time, the core network element is LMF) can also be carried in other messages, which is not limited in this application. In another case, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the core network element.
需要说明的是,Q1个终端的信息也可以通过核心网网元和LMC之间交互的其他消息发送给LMC,例如,注册完成之后的消息(例如,现有的NGAP消息(例如,AMF配置更新消息)或新的NGAP消息中),不限于注册请求和注册响应。此处为了方便理解,采用注册请求和注册响应进行举例说明。It should be noted that the Q1 terminal information can also be sent to the LMC through other messages exchanged between the core network element and the LMC, for example, the message after the registration is completed (for example, the existing NGAP message (for example, AMF configuration update) Message) or new NGAP message), not limited to registration request and registration response. In order to facilitate understanding, the registration request and registration response are used as examples.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和LMC之间可以通过AMF交互信息。终端的信息可以为终端标识等。In the case where the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the LMC can exchange information through the AMF. The information of the terminal may be a terminal identification or the like.
1003、LMC向M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息。其中,第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,第六指示信息指示的一个或多个终端接入第六指示信息对应的网络设备。相应的,M7个网络设备从LMC接收第六指示信息。1003. The LMC sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices. The sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information. Correspondingly, M7 network devices receive the sixth indication information from the LMC.
示例性的,若Q1=3,Q1个终端分别为终端1、终端2和终端3,终端1和终端2接入网络设备1,终端3接入网络设备2,则LMC向网络设备1发送的第六指示信息用于指示终端1和终端2支持第二定位类型,LMC向网络设备2发送的第六指示信息用于指示终端3支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if Q1=3, Q1 terminals are terminal 1, terminal 2, and terminal 3 respectively, terminal 1 and terminal 2 are connected to network device 1, and terminal 3 is connected to network device 2, then LMC sends to network device 1 The sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 support the second positioning type, and the sixth indication information sent by the LMC to the network device 2 is used to indicate that the terminal 3 supports the second positioning type.
1004、在M7个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对支持第二定位类型的终端定位时,该网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。1004. When any one of the M7 network devices needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图10,在步骤1004之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 10, before step 1004, the method further includes:
1003A、LMC向M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M7个网络设备从LMC接收LMC的位置信息。1003A. The LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M7 network devices. Correspondingly, M7 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
与步骤1003A相关的描述可参见上述步骤603A,不再赘述。For the description related to step 1003A, refer to the above step 603A, which will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图10,在步骤1002之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 10, after step 1002, the method further includes:
1005、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q2个终端的相关信息,Q2为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。1005. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of Q2 terminals whose information of the second positioning type has changed, and Q2 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
步骤1005的具体实现与步骤605类似,区别仅在于此处支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的为终端的信息,而不是网络设备的信息,具体可参照步骤605的相关描述进行理解,具体的,将M2个网络设备替换为Q2个终端进行理解即可,不再赘述。The specific implementation of step 1005 is similar to step 605. The only difference is that the information that supports the second positioning type changes here is the information of the terminal, not the information of the network device. For details, please refer to the relevant description of step 605 for understanding. , Replace M2 network devices with Q2 terminals for understanding, so I won’t go into details here.
步骤1005和步骤1003以及步骤1004的执行顺序不分先后。Step 1005, step 1003, and step 1004 are executed in no particular order.
可选的,在步骤1005之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, after step 1005, the method further includes:
1006、LMC向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息。其中,第七指示信息用于指示接入第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持第二定位类型,第一终端为Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。相应的,第三网络设备从LMC接收第七指示信息。1006. The LMC sends seventh indication information to the third network device. The seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the third network device supports the second positioning type, and the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals. Correspondingly, the third network device receives the seventh indication information from the LMC.
具体的,若第一终端从支持第二定位类型变为不支持第二定位类型,第七指示信息具体用于指示第一终端不支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一终端属于Q1个终端,在后续过程中,第二网络设备确定不对第一终端进行定位。若第一终端从不支持第二定位类型变为支持第二定位类型,第七指示信息具体用于指示第一终端支持第二定位类型,该情况下,第一终端不属于Q1个终端,在后续过程中,在第二网络设备需要对第一终端进行定位时,向LMC发送定位请求。Specifically, if the first terminal changes from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, the seventh indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first terminal does not support the second positioning type. In this case, the first terminal belongs to Q1. For the terminal, in the subsequent process, the second network device determines not to locate the first terminal. If the first terminal changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type, the seventh indication information is specifically used to indicate that the first terminal supports the second positioning type. In this case, the first terminal does not belong to the Q1 terminal. In the subsequent process, when the second network device needs to locate the first terminal, it sends a location request to the LMC.
其中,第一终端从支持第二定位类型变为不再支持第二定位类型的一种可能的场景为:第一终端移出LMC的管辖区域。LMC的管辖区域可以为能够向该LMC请求定位的所有的网络设备的覆盖范围。第一终端从不支持第二定位类型变为支持第二定位类型的一种可能的场景为:第一终端移入LMC的管辖区域。A possible scenario in which the first terminal changes from supporting the second positioning type to no longer supporting the second positioning type is: the first terminal moves out of the jurisdiction of the LMC. The jurisdiction of the LMC may be the coverage of all network devices that can request positioning from the LMC. A possible scenario in which the first terminal changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type is: the first terminal moves into the jurisdiction of the LMC.
图10所示的实施例提供的方法,LMC通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 10, the LMC can authorize the network device to use the second positioning when it needs to locate certain terminals by sending the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type. The type locates the terminal, so as to solve the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
场景3.2、核心网网元向网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端。Scenario 3.2: The core network element instructs the network device to support the terminal of the second positioning type.
在场景3.2下,参见图11,该定位方法包括:In scenario 3.2, referring to Figure 11, the positioning method includes:
1101、核心网网元确定M8个网络设备对应的第六指示信息。其中,第六指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个终端(记为Q4个终端),第六指示信息指示的Q4个终端接入与第六指示信息对应的网络设备。M8和Q4均为大于0的整数。1101. A core network element determines sixth indication information corresponding to M8 network devices. The sixth indication information is used to indicate one or more terminals (denoted as Q4 terminals) that support the second positioning type, and Q4 terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access the network device corresponding to the sixth indication information. Both M8 and Q4 are integers greater than zero.
可选的,第二定位类型为RI-LR。Optionally, the second positioning type is RI-LR.
可选的,核心网网元为AMF或LMF。Optionally, the core network element is AMF or LMF.
在第一种实现方式中,核心网网元可以自己确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。例如,每个终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息位于核心网网元存储的终端的签约信息中,核心网网元根据这些信息确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。In the first implementation manner, the core network element can determine by itself which terminals support the second positioning type. For example, the information about whether each terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the core network element, and the core network element determines which terminals support the second positioning type according to the information.
在第二种实现方式中,核心网网元可以根据从其他核心网网元接收到的信息确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。例如,终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息位于UDM存储的终端的签约信息中,AMF可以从UDM中获取终端的签约信息。该情况下,核心网网元为AMF时,AMF可以根据每个终端的签约信息确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。核心网网元为LMF时,LMF可以从AMF获取终端的签约信息,从而根据每个终端的签约信息确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。In the second implementation manner, the core network element may determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to information received from other core network elements. For example, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type is located in the subscription information of the terminal stored in the UDM, and the AMF can obtain the subscription information of the terminal from the UDM. In this case, when the core network element is the AMF, the AMF may determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to the subscription information of each terminal. When the core network element is the LMF, the LMF can obtain the subscription information of the terminal from the AMF, so as to determine which terminals support the second positioning type according to the subscription information of each terminal.
在第三种实现方式中,核心网网元从其他核心网网元接收支持第二定位类型的终端的信息。例如,核心网网元为LMF时,AMF确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型,LMF可以从AMF获取这些信息。In the third implementation manner, the core network element receives the information of the terminal supporting the second positioning type from other core network elements. For example, when the core network element is the LMF, the AMF determines which terminals support the second positioning type, and the LMF can obtain this information from the AMF.
在第四种实现方式中,核心网网元根据终端上报的是否支持第二定位类型的信息,确定哪些终端支持第二定位类型。In the fourth implementation manner, the core network element determines which terminals support the second positioning type according to the information reported by the terminal whether it supports the second positioning type.
示例性的,终端是否支持第二定位类型的信息可以携带在RRC建立完成消息中 (此时,核心网网元为AMF),也可以携带在终端向LMF发送的用于终端能力上报的LTE定位协议消息中(此时,核心网网元为LMF),还可以携带在其他消息中,本申请不作限制。Exemplarily, the information about whether the terminal supports the second positioning type can be carried in the RRC establishment complete message (at this time, the core network element is AMF), or it can be carried in the LTE positioning sent by the terminal to the LMF for terminal capability reporting In the protocol message (at this time, the core network element is LMF), it can also be carried in other messages, which is not limited in this application.
1102、核心网网元向M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息。相应的,M8个网络设备从核心网网元接收第六指示信息。1102. The core network element sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M8 network devices. Correspondingly, the M8 network devices receive the sixth indication information from the core network network element.
示例性的,若Q4=3,Q4个终端分别为终端1、终端2和终端3,终端1和终端2接入网络设备1,终端3接入网络设备2,则核心网网元向网络设备1发送的第六指示信息用于指示终端1和终端2支持第二定位类型,核心网网元向网络设备2发送的第六指示信息用于指示终端3支持第二定位类型。Exemplarily, if Q4=3, the Q4 terminals are terminal 1, terminal 2, and terminal 3 respectively, terminal 1 and terminal 2 are connected to network device 1, and terminal 3 is connected to network device 2, then the core network element sends the network device to the network device. The sixth indication information sent by 1 is used to indicate that the terminal 1 and the terminal 2 support the second positioning type, and the sixth indication information sent by the core network element to the network device 2 is used to indicate that the terminal 3 supports the second positioning type.
在核心网网元为LMF的情况下,LMF和网络设备之间可以通过AMF交互信息。When the core network element is the LMF, the LMF and the network device can exchange information through the AMF.
其中,第六指示信息可以携带在AMF和网络设备之间交互的初始上下文建立请求(Initial Context Setup Request)中,也可以携带在AMF和网络设备之间交互的其他消息中。The sixth indication information may be carried in an initial context setup request (Initial Context Setup Request) exchanged between the AMF and the network device, or may be carried in other messages exchanged between the AMF and the network device.
1103、在M8个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备需要对支持第二定位类型的终端定位时,网络设备向LMC发送定位请求。1103. When any one of the M8 network devices needs to locate a terminal that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
可选的,参见图11,在步骤1103之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 11, before step 1103, the method further includes:
1102A、核心网网元向M8个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送LMC的位置信息。相应的,M8个网络设备从核心网网元接收LMC的位置信息。1102A. The core network element sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M8 network devices. Correspondingly, the M8 network devices receive the location information of the LMC from the core network network element.
与步骤1102A相关的描述可参见上述步骤702A,不再赘述。For descriptions related to step 1102A, refer to the above step 702A, which will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图11,在步骤1103之前,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 11, before step 1103, the method further includes:
1102B、核心网网元向LMC发送M8个网络设备的信息。1102B. The core network element sends information about M8 network devices to the LMC.
与步骤1102B相关的描述可参见上述步骤902B,不再赘述。For the description related to step 1102B, refer to the foregoing step 902B, which will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图11,在步骤1103之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 11, after step 1103, the method further includes:
1104、核心网网元向LMC发送更新信息。其中,更新信息用于指示是否支持第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q3个终端的相关信息,Q3为大于0的整数。相应的,LMC从核心网网元接收更新信息。1104. The core network element sends update information to the LMC. Wherein, the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of Q3 terminals whose information of the second positioning type changes, and Q3 is an integer greater than 0. Correspondingly, the LMC receives update information from the core network element.
步骤1104的具体实现与上述步骤1005类似,可参照进行理解,不再赘述。The specific implementation of step 1104 is similar to the above step 1005, which can be understood by reference, and will not be repeated.
可选的,参见图11,在步骤1103之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, referring to FIG. 11, after step 1103, the method further includes:
1105、核心网网元向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息。其中,第七指示信息用于指示接入第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持第二定位类型,第一终端为Q3个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。相应的,第三网络设备从核心网网元接收第七指示信息。1105. The core network element sends seventh indication information to the third network device. The seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the third network device supports the second positioning type, and the first terminal is any one or more of the Q3 terminals. Correspondingly, the third network device receives the seventh indication information from the core network element.
关于第七指示信息的描述可参见上述场景3.1,不再赘述。For the description of the seventh indication information, refer to the above scenario 3.1, which will not be repeated here.
第一终端从支持第二定位类型变为不再支持第二定位类型,或者,第一终端从不支持第二定位类型变为支持第二定位类型的可能的场景可参见上述场景3.1,不再赘述。The possible scenario where the first terminal changes from supporting the second positioning type to no longer supporting the second positioning type, or the first terminal changes from not supporting the second positioning type to supporting the second positioning type can be found in the above scenario 3.1. Go into details.
图11所示的实施例提供的方法,核心网网元通过向为支持第二定位类型的终端服务的网络设备发送第六指示信息,可以授权网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 11, the core network element sends the sixth indication information to the network device that supports the terminal service of the second positioning type, and can authorize the network device to use when it needs to locate certain terminals. The second positioning type locates the terminal, thereby solving the problem of the positioning initiated by the network equipment that has not deployed the LMC.
在上述场景3.2中,核心网网元可以一次性确定支持第二定位类型的终端,并一次性向M8个网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端。核心网网元也可以在每个终端 接入核心网的过程中,向网络设备指示当前终端是否支持第二定位类型,也就是说,若上述Q4个终端为多个终端,核心网网元要经历一段时间,才可以完成向M8个网络设备指示支持第二定位类型的终端的过程。以下以核心网网元为AMF、且1个终端接入核心网的过程为例,对向网络设备指示当前终端是否支持第二定位类型过程进行示例性说明。In the above scenario 3.2, the core network element may determine the terminals that support the second positioning type at one time, and instruct the M8 network devices to support the terminals of the second positioning type at one time. The core network element can also indicate to the network device whether the current terminal supports the second positioning type during the process of each terminal accessing the core network, that is, if the above Q4 terminals are multiple terminals, the core network element must After a period of time, the process of indicating to the M8 network devices the terminal supporting the second positioning type can be completed. In the following, a process in which the core network element is an AMF and a terminal accesses the core network is taken as an example to illustrate the process of indicating to the network device whether the current terminal supports the second positioning type.
参见图12,该过程包括:See Figure 12, the process includes:
1201、终端向网络设备发送RRC建立完成消息。相应的,网络设备从终端接收RRC建立完成消息。1201. The terminal sends an RRC establishment complete message to a network device. Correspondingly, the network device receives the RRC establishment complete message from the terminal.
1202、网络设备向AMF发送初始终端消息(Initial UE message)。相应的,AMF从网络设备接收初始终端消息。1202. The network device sends an initial terminal message (Initial UE message) to the AMF. Correspondingly, the AMF receives the initial terminal message from the network device.
1203、AMF向网络设备发送初始上下文建立请求,初始上下文建立请求中携带第六指示信息。相应的,网络设备从AMF接收初始上下文建立请求。1203. The AMF sends an initial context establishment request to the network device, where the initial context establishment request carries sixth indication information. Correspondingly, the network device receives the initial context establishment request from the AMF.
其中,第六指示信息用于指示终端支持第二定位类型。AMF获取终端是否支持第二定位类型的过程可参见步骤1101的相关描述,不再赘述。The sixth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal supports the second positioning type. For the process of AMF obtaining whether the terminal supports the second positioning type, please refer to the related description of step 1101, which will not be repeated here.
其中,图12中的各个消息的作用可参见现有技术,与现有技术不同的点在于,本申请在初始上下文建立请求中携带了第六指示信息。The role of each message in FIG. 12 can be referred to in the prior art. The difference from the prior art is that this application carries the sixth indication information in the initial context establishment request.
场景3.3、终端向网络设备指示是否支持第二定位类型。Scenario 3.3: The terminal indicates to the network device whether to support the second positioning type.
在场景3.3下,参见图13,该定位方法包括:In scenario 3.3, referring to Figure 13, the positioning method includes:
1301、终端向网络设备发送第八指示信息。其中,第八指示信息用于指示终端是否支持第二定位类型。相应的,网络设备从终端接收第八指示信息。1301. The terminal sends eighth indication information to a network device. The eighth indication information is used to indicate whether the terminal supports the second positioning type. Correspondingly, the network device receives the eighth indication information from the terminal.
其中,终端可以在接入网络设备的过程中,将是否支持第二定位类型的信息发送给网络设备,网络设备将该信息存储进终端上下文中。Wherein, the terminal may send information about whether the second positioning type is supported to the network device during the process of accessing the network device, and the network device stores the information in the terminal context.
其中,第八指示信息可以携带在RRC建立完成消息中,也可以携带在其他RRC消息中。Among them, the eighth indication information may be carried in the RRC establishment complete message, and may also be carried in other RRC messages.
1302、在第八指示信息指示终端支持第二定位类型的情况下,在网络设备需要对终端定位时,向LMC发送定位请求。1302. When the eighth indication information indicates that the terminal supports the second positioning type, when the network device needs to locate the terminal, send a positioning request to the LMC.
可选的,网络设备通过上述步骤1003A或步骤1102A获取LMC的位置信息,具体可参见上文进行理解,不再赘述。Optionally, the network device obtains the location information of the LMC through the above step 1003A or step 1102A. For details, refer to the above for understanding, and will not be repeated here.
可选的,在第八指示信息指示终端支持第二定位类型的情况下,若终端从支持第二定位类型变为了不支持第二定位类型,参见图13,在步骤1302之后,该方法还包括:Optionally, in the case where the eighth indication information indicates that the terminal supports the second positioning type, if the terminal changes from supporting the second positioning type to not supporting the second positioning type, referring to FIG. 13, after step 1302, the method further includes :
1303、终端向网络设备发送第九指示信息,第九指示信息用于指示终端不支持第二定位类型。相应的,网络设备从终端接收第九指示信息。该情况下,网络设备确定不对终端进行定位。1303. The terminal sends ninth indication information to the network device, where the ninth indication information is used to indicate that the terminal does not support the second positioning type. Correspondingly, the network device receives the ninth indication information from the terminal. In this case, the network device determines not to locate the terminal.
其中,一个终端是否支持第二定位类型可以是核心网为该终端指示的,或,预配置在终端中的,或,终端自己确定的。Among them, whether a terminal supports the second positioning type may be indicated by the core network for the terminal, or pre-configured in the terminal, or determined by the terminal itself.
图13所示的实施例提供的方法,终端通过向网络设备指示是否支持第二定位类型,可以使得网络设备在需要对某些终端进行定位时,采用第二定位类型对终端进行定位,从而解决未部署LMC的网络设备发起定位的问题。In the method provided by the embodiment shown in FIG. 13, the terminal indicates to the network device whether it supports the second positioning type, so that the network device can use the second positioning type to locate the terminal when it needs to locate certain terminals, thereby solving the problem. The network equipment that has not deployed LMC initiates the positioning problem.
本申请实施例描述的系统架构以及业务场景是为了更加清楚的说明本申请实施例的技术方案,并不构成对于本申请实施例提供的技术方案的限定。本领域普通技术人员可知,随着网络架构的演变和新业务场景的出现,本申请实施例提供的技术方案对于类似的技术问题,同样适用。The system architecture and business scenarios described in the embodiments of the present application are intended to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, and do not constitute a limitation on the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application. A person of ordinary skill in the art knows that with the evolution of network architecture and the emergence of new business scenarios, the technical solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application are equally applicable to similar technical problems.
上述主要从方法的角度对本申请实施例的方案进行了介绍。可以理解的是,各个网元,例如,LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端为了实现上述功能,其包含了执行各个功能相应的硬件结构和软件模块中的至少一个。本领域技术人员应该很容易意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,本申请能够以硬件或硬件和计算机软件的结合形式来实现。某个功能究竟以硬件还是计算机软件驱动硬件的方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。The foregoing mainly introduces the solutions of the embodiments of the present application from the perspective of methods. It can be understood that, in order to realize the above-mentioned functions, each network element, such as LMC, core network network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminal includes at least one of the corresponding hardware structures and software modules that perform each function. one. Those skilled in the art should easily realize that in combination with the units and algorithm steps of the examples described in the embodiments disclosed herein, the present application can be implemented in the form of hardware or a combination of hardware and computer software. Whether a certain function is executed by hardware or computer software-driven hardware depends on the specific application and design constraint conditions of the technical solution. Professionals and technicians can use different methods for each specific application to implement the described functions, but such implementation should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
本申请实施例可以根据上述方法示例对LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端进行功能单元的划分,例如,可以对应各个功能划分各个功能单元,也可以将两个或两个以上的功能集成在一个处理单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。需要说明的是,本申请实施例中对单元的划分是示意性的,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式。The embodiments of the present application can divide functional units of LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals according to the foregoing method examples. For example, each functional unit can be divided corresponding to each function, or two Or two or more functions are integrated in one processing unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be implemented in the form of hardware or software functional unit. It should be noted that the division of units in the embodiments of the present application is illustrative, and is only a logical function division, and there may be other division methods in actual implementation.
示例性的,图14示出了上述实施例中所涉及的定位装置(记为定位装置140)的一种可能的结构示意图,该定位装置140包括处理单元1401和通信单元1402。可选的,还包括存储单元1403。定位装置140可以用于示意上述实施例中的LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端的结构。Exemplarily, FIG. 14 shows a schematic diagram of a possible structure of the positioning device (denoted as the positioning device 140) involved in the foregoing embodiment. The positioning device 140 includes a processing unit 1401 and a communication unit 1402. Optionally, a storage unit 1403 is further included. The positioning device 140 may be used to illustrate the structure of the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals in the foregoing embodiment.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的LMC的结构时,处理单元1401用于对LMC的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1401用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的全部步骤,图7中的702B、703和704,图8中的全部步骤,图9中的902B、903和904,图10中的全部步骤,图11中的1102B、1103和1104,图13中的1302,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的LMC执行的动作。处理单元1401可以通过通信单元1402与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的核心网网元通信。存储单元1403用于存储LMC的程序代码和数据。When the structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the LMC involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processing unit 1401 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5. The storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)的结构时,处理单元1401用于对核心网网元的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1401用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的601、602和605,图7中的701、702、702A、702B、704和705,图8中的801、802和805,图9中的901、902、902A、902B、904和905,图10中的1001、1002和1005,图11中的1101、1102、1102A、1102B、1104和1105,图12中的1202和1203(此时,核心网网元为AMF),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的核心网网元执行的动作。处理单元1401可以通过通信单元1402与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的LMC通信。存储单元1403用于存储核心网网元的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the core network element (for example, SMF, AMF) involved in the above embodiment, the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, , The processing unit 1401 is used to perform all the steps in Figure 5, 601, 602, and 605 in Figure 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704, and 705 in Figure 7, and 801, 802, and 805 in Figure 8, 901, 902, 902A, 902B, 904, and 905 in Figure 9, 1001, 1002, and 1005 in Figure 10, 1101, 1102, 1102A, 1102B, 1104, and 1105 in Figure 11, and 1202 and 1203 in Figure 12 ( At this time, the core network element is AMF), and/or the actions performed by the core network element in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5. The storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data of the core network element.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的网络设备的结构时,处理单元1401用于对网络设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1401用于执行图6中的603A、603和604(此时,网络设备为M1个网络设备中的任意一个),图6中的606(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图7中的702、702A和703(此时,网络设备为M3个网络设备中的任 意一个),图7中的705(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图8中的803A、803和804(此时,网络设备为M5个网络设备中的任意一个),图8中的806(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图9中的902、902A和903(此时,网络设备为M6个网络设备中的任意一个),图9中的905(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图10中的1003A、1003和1004(此时,网络设备为M7个网络设备中的任意一个),图10中的1006(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图11中的1102、1102A和1103(此时,网络设备为M8个网络设备中的任意一个),图11中的1105(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图12中的1101至1103,图13中的1301至1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的网络设备执行的动作。处理单元1401可以通过通信单元1402与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图6中的LMC通信。存储单元1403用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the network device involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device. For example, the processing unit 1401 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG. 8 (at this time, the network device is Any one of M5 network devices), 806 in Fig. 8 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), and 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 (at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices) Any one), 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time , The network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG. 12, 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the network device in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6. The storage unit 1403 is used to store the program code and data of the network device.
当图14所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理单元1401用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理单元1401用于执行图12中的1201,图13中的1301和1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理单元1401可以通过通信单元1402与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图12中的网络设备通信。存储单元1403用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 14 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processing unit 1401 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal. For example, the processing unit 1401 is used to execute 1201 in FIG. 12, 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processing unit 1401 may communicate with other network entities through the communication unit 1402, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12. The storage unit 1403 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
示例性的,定位装置140可以为一个设备也可以为芯片或芯片系统。Exemplarily, the positioning device 140 may be a device, a chip or a chip system.
当定位装置140为一个设备时,处理单元1401可以是处理器;通信单元1402可以是通信接口、收发器,或,输入接口和/或输出接口。可选地,收发器可以为收发电路。可选地,输入接口可以为输入电路,输出接口可以为输出电路。When the positioning device 140 is a device, the processing unit 1401 may be a processor; the communication unit 1402 may be a communication interface, a transceiver, or an input interface and/or an output interface. Optionally, the transceiver may be a transceiver circuit. Optionally, the input interface may be an input circuit, and the output interface may be an output circuit.
当定位装置140为芯片或芯片系统时,通信单元1402可以是该芯片或芯片系统上的通信接口、输入接口和/或输出接口、接口电路、输出电路、输入电路、管脚或相关电路等。处理单元1401可以是处理器、处理电路或逻辑电路等。When the positioning device 140 is a chip or a chip system, the communication unit 1402 may be a communication interface, an input interface and/or an output interface, an interface circuit, an output circuit, an input circuit, a pin or related circuit on the chip or a chip system. The processing unit 1401 may be a processor, a processing circuit, a logic circuit, or the like.
图14中的集成的单元如果以软件功能模块的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实施例的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中,包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机,服务器,或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。存储计算机软件产品的存储介质包括:U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。If the integrated unit in FIG. 14 is implemented in the form of a software function module and sold or used as an independent product, it can be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application are essentially or the part that contributes to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions can be embodied in the form of software products, and the computer software products are stored in a storage The medium includes several instructions to enable a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application. Storage media for storing computer software products include: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), random access memory (random access memory, RAM), magnetic disks or optical disks, etc., which can store program codes Medium.
本申请实施例还提供了一种定位装置的硬件结构示意图,参见图15或图16,该定位装置包括处理器1501,可选的,还包括与处理器1501连接的存储器1502。The embodiment of the present application also provides a schematic diagram of the hardware structure of a positioning device. Referring to FIG. 15 or FIG. 16, the positioning device includes a processor 1501, and optionally, a memory 1502 connected to the processor 1501.
处理器1501可以是一个通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU)、微处理器、特定应用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit,ASIC),或者一个或多个用于控制本申请方案程序执行的集成电路。处理器1501也可以包括多个CPU,并且处理器1501可以是一个单核(single-CPU)处理器,也可以是多核(multi-CPU)处理器。这里的处理器可以指一个或多个设备、电路或用于处理数据(例如计算机程序指令)的处理核。The processor 1501 may be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a microprocessor, an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC), or one or more programs for controlling the execution of the program of this application. integrated circuit. The processor 1501 may also include multiple CPUs, and the processor 1501 may be a single-CPU processor or a multi-CPU processor. The processor here may refer to one or more devices, circuits, or processing cores for processing data (for example, computer program instructions).
存储器1502可以是ROM或可存储静态信息和指令的其他类型的静态存储设备、RAM或者可存储信息和指令的其他类型的动态存储设备,也可以是电可擦可编程只读存储器 (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory,EEPROM)、只读光盘(compact disc read-only memory,CD-ROM)或其他光盘存储、光碟存储(包括压缩光碟、激光碟、光碟、数字通用光碟、蓝光光碟等)、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质,本申请实施例对此不作任何限制。存储器1502可以是独立存在(此时,处理器可以位于定位装置外,也可以位于定位装置内),也可以和处理器1501集成在一起。其中,存储器1502中可以包含计算机程序代码。处理器1501用于执行存储器1502中存储的计算机程序代码,从而实现本申请实施例提供的方法。The memory 1502 may be a ROM or other types of static storage devices that can store static information and instructions, RAM, or other types of dynamic storage devices that can store information and instructions, or an electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically erasable programmable read-only memory). read-only memory, EEPROM), compact disc (read-only memory, CD-ROM) or other optical disc storage, optical disc storage (including compact discs, laser discs, optical discs, digital universal discs, Blu-ray discs, etc.), magnetic disks A storage medium or other magnetic storage device, or any other medium that can be used to carry or store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures and that can be accessed by a computer, and the embodiment of the present application does not impose any limitation on this. The memory 1502 may exist independently (at this time, the processor may be located outside the positioning device, or may be located in the positioning device), or may be integrated with the processor 1501. Wherein, the memory 1502 may contain computer program code. The processor 1501 is configured to execute the computer program code stored in the memory 1502, so as to implement the method provided in the embodiment of the present application.
在第一种可能的实现方式中,参见图15,定位装置还包括收发器1503。处理器1501、存储器1502和收发器1503通过总线相连接。收发器1503用于与其他设备或通信网络通信。可选的,收发器1503可以包括发射机和接收机。收发器1503中用于实现接收功能的器件可以视为接收机,接收机用于执行本申请实施例中的接收的步骤。收发器1503中用于实现发送功能的器件可以视为发射机,发射机用于执行本申请实施例中的发送的步骤。In the first possible implementation manner, referring to FIG. 15, the positioning device further includes a transceiver 1503. The processor 1501, the memory 1502, and the transceiver 1503 are connected by a bus. The transceiver 1503 is used to communicate with other devices or a communication network. Optionally, the transceiver 1503 may include a transmitter and a receiver. The device used for implementing the receiving function in the transceiver 1503 can be regarded as a receiver, and the receiver is used to perform the receiving steps in the embodiment of the present application. The device used in the transceiver 1503 to implement the sending function can be regarded as a transmitter, and the transmitter is used to perform the sending steps in the embodiment of the present application.
基于第一种可能的实现方式,图15所示的结构示意图可以用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端的结构。Based on the first possible implementation manner, the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 may be used to illustrate the structures of the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals involved in the foregoing embodiment.
当图15所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的LMC的结构时,处理器1501用于对LMC的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的全部步骤,图7中的702B、703和704,图8中的全部步骤,图9中的902B、903和904,图10中的全部步骤,图11中的1102B、1103和1104,图13中的1302,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的LMC执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过收发器1503与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的核心网网元通信。存储器1502用于存储LMC的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 is used to illustrate the structure of the LMC involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processor 1501 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5. The memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
当图15所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)的结构时,处理器1501用于对核心网网元的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的601、602和605,图7中的701、702、702A、702B、704和705,图8中的801、802和805,图9中的901、902、902A、902B、904和905,图10中的1001、1002和1005,图11中的1101、1102、1102A、1102B、1104和1105,图12中的1202和1203(此时,核心网网元为AMF),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的核心网网元执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过收发器1503与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的LMC通信。存储器1502用于存储核心网网元的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 is used to illustrate the structure of the core network element (for example, SMF, AMF) involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, , The processor 1501 is used to execute all the steps in Fig. 5, 601, 602 and 605 in Fig. 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704 and 705 in Fig. 7, and 801, 802 and 805 in Fig. 8, 901, 902, 902A, 902B, 904, and 905 in Figure 9, 1001, 1002, and 1005 in Figure 10, 1101, 1102, 1102A, 1102B, 1104, and 1105 in Figure 11, and 1202 and 1203 in Figure 12 ( At this time, the core network element is AMF), and/or the actions performed by the core network element in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5. The memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the core network element.
当图15所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的网络设备的结构时,处理器1501用于对网络设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图6中的603A、603和604(此时,网络设备为M1个网络设备中的任意一个),图6中的606(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图7中的702、702A和703(此时,网络设备为M3个网络设备中的任意一个),图7中的705(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图8中的803A、803和804(此时,网络设备为M5个网络设备中的任意一个),图8中的806(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图9中的902、902A和903(此时,网络设备为M6个网络设备中的任意一个),图9中的905(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图10中的1003A、1003和1004(此时,网络设备为M7个网络设备中的任意一个),图10中的1006(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图11中的1102、1102A和1103(此时,网络设备为M8个网络设备中的任意一个),图11中 的1105(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图12中的1101至1103,图13中的1301至1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的网络设备执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过收发器1503与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图6中的LMC通信。存储器1502用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 is used to illustrate the structure of the network device involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device. For example, the processor 1501 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG. 8 (at this time, the network device is Any one of M5 network devices), 806 in Fig. 8 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), and 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 (at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices) Any one), 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time , The network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG. 12, 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the network device in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6. The memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
当图15所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理器1501用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图12中的1201和图13中的1301和1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过收发器1503与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图12中的网络设备通信。存储器1502用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 15 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal. For example, the processor 1501 is used to execute 1201 and 1201 in FIG. 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through the transceiver 1503, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12. The memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
在第二种可能的实现方式中,处理器1501包括逻辑电路以及输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个。示例性的,输出接口用于执行相应方法中的发送的动作,输入接口用于执行相应方法中的接收的动作。In a second possible implementation manner, the processor 1501 includes a logic circuit and at least one of an input interface and an output interface. Exemplarily, the output interface is used to execute the sending action in the corresponding method, and the input interface is used to execute the receiving action in the corresponding method.
基于第二种可能的实现方式,参见图16,图16所示的结构示意图可以用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端的结构。Based on the second possible implementation manner, refer to FIG. 16. The schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 can be used to illustrate the LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals involved in the foregoing embodiment. structure.
当图16所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的LMC的结构时,处理器1501用于对LMC的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的全部步骤,图7中的702B、703和704,图8中的全部步骤,图9中的902B、903和904,图10中的全部步骤,图11中的1102B、1103和1104,图13中的1302,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的LMC执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的核心网网元通信。存储器1502用于存储LMC的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 is used to illustrate the structure of the LMC involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the LMC, for example, the processor 1501 is used to perform all the steps in FIG. 5 , All the steps in Figure 6, 702B, 703, and 704 in Figure 7, all the steps in Figure 8, 902B, 903, and 904 in Figure 9, all the steps in Figure 10, 1102B, 1103, and 11 in Figure 11 1104, 1302 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the LMC in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the core network element in FIG. 5. The memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the LMC.
当图16所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)的结构时,处理器1501用于对核心网网元的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图5中的全部步骤,图6中的601、602和605,图7中的701、702、702A、702B、704和705,图8中的801、802和805,图9中的901、902、902A、902B、904和905,图10中的1001、1002和1005,图11中的1101、1102、1102A、1102B、1104和1105,图12中的1202和1203(此时,核心网网元为AMF),和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的核心网网元执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图5中的LMC通信。存储器1502用于存储核心网网元的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 is used to illustrate the structure of the core network element (for example, SMF, AMF) involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the core network element, for example, , The processor 1501 is used to execute all the steps in Fig. 5, 601, 602 and 605 in Fig. 6, 701, 702, 702A, 702B, 704 and 705 in Fig. 7, and 801, 802 and 805 in Fig. 8, 901, 902, 902A, 902B, 904, and 905 in Figure 9, 1001, 1002, and 1005 in Figure 10, 1101, 1102, 1102A, 1102B, 1104, and 1105 in Figure 11, and 1202 and 1203 in Figure 12 ( At this time, the core network element is AMF), and/or the actions performed by the core network element in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 5. The memory 1502 is used to store the program code and data of the core network element.
当图16所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的网络设备的结构时,处理器1501用于对网络设备的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图6中的603A、603和604(此时,网络设备为M1个网络设备中的任意一个),图6中的606(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图7中的702、702A和703(此时,网络设备为M3个网络设备中的任意一个),图7中的705(此时,网络设备为第一网络设备),图8中的803A、803和804(此时,网络设备为M5个网络设备中的任意一个),图8中的806(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图9中的902、902A和903(此时,网络设备为M6个网络设备中的任意一个),图9中的905(此时,网络设备为第二网络设备),图10中的1003A、1003和1004(此时,网络设备为M7个网络设备中的任意一个),图10中的1006(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图11中的1102、1102A和1103(此时,网络设备为M8个网络设备中的任意一个),图11中 的1105(此时,网络设备为第三网络设备),图12中的1101至1103,图13中的1301至1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的网络设备执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图6中的LMC通信。存储器1502用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 is used to illustrate the structure of the network device involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the network device. For example, the processor 1501 is used to execute the operation shown in FIG. 6 603A, 603, and 604 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M1 network devices), 606 in Fig. 6 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 702, 702A, and 703 in Fig. 7 ( At this time, the network device is any one of the M3 network devices), 705 in FIG. 7 (at this time, the network device is the first network device), and 803A, 803, and 804 in FIG. 8 (at this time, the network device is Any one of M5 network devices), 806 in Fig. 8 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), and 902, 902A, and 903 in Fig. 9 (at this time, the network device is one of the M6 network devices) Any one), 905 in Figure 9 (at this time, the network device is the second network device), 1003A, 1003, and 1004 in Figure 10 (at this time, the network device is any one of the M7 network devices), Figure 10 1006 in Figure 11 (the network device is the third network device at this time), 1102, 1102A, and 1103 in Figure 11 (the network device is any one of the M8 network devices at this time), and 1105 in Figure 11 (this time , The network device is the third network device), 1101 to 1103 in FIG. 12, 1301 to 1303 in FIG. 13, and/or actions performed by the network device in other processes described in the embodiments of this application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the LMC in FIG. 6. The memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
当图16所示的结构示意图用于示意上述实施例中所涉及的终端的结构时,处理器1501用于对终端的动作进行控制管理,例如,处理器1501用于执行图12中的1201和图13中的1301和1303,和/或本申请实施例中所描述的其他过程中的终端执行的动作。处理器1501可以通过输入接口和输出接口中的至少一个与其他网络实体通信,例如,与图12中的网络设备通信。存储器1502用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。When the schematic structural diagram shown in FIG. 16 is used to illustrate the structure of the terminal involved in the foregoing embodiment, the processor 1501 is used to control and manage the actions of the terminal. For example, the processor 1501 is used to execute 1201 and 1201 in FIG. 1301 and 1303 in FIG. 13 and/or actions performed by the terminal in other processes described in the embodiments of the present application. The processor 1501 may communicate with other network entities through at least one of the input interface and the output interface, for example, communicate with the network device in FIG. 12. The memory 1502 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
在实现过程中,本实施例提供的方法中的各步骤可以通过处理器中的硬件的集成逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本申请实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成,或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。In the implementation process, each step in the method provided in this embodiment can be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor or instructions in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in combination with the embodiments of the present application may be directly embodied as being executed and completed by a hardware processor, or executed and completed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,包括计算机执行指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方法。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium, including computer-executable instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the above-mentioned methods.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序产品,包含计算机执行指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述任一方法。The embodiments of the present application also provide a computer program product, which contains computer-executable instructions, which when run on a computer, cause the computer to execute any of the above-mentioned methods.
本申请实施例还提供了一种通信系统,包括:LMC、核心网网元(例如,SMF、AMF)、网络设备和终端中的任意一个或多个。The embodiment of the present application also provides a communication system, including any one or more of LMC, core network elements (for example, SMF, AMF), network equipment, and terminals.
本申请实施例还提供了一种定位装置,包括:处理器和接口,处理器通过接口与存储器耦合,当处理器执行存储器中的计算机程序或计算机执行指令时,使得上述实施例提供的任意一种方法被执行。An embodiment of the present application also provides a positioning device, including a processor and an interface, the processor is coupled with the memory through the interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or the computer execution instruction in the memory, any one of the above-mentioned embodiments provides This method is executed.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件程序实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式来实现。该计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机指令。在计算机上加载和执行计算机程序指令时,全部或部分地产生按照本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、或者其他可编程装置。计算机指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,计算机指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或者数据中心通过有线(例如同轴电缆、光纤、数字用户线(digital subscriber line,DSL))或无线(例如红外、无线、微波等)方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是包含一个或多个可以用介质集成的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。可用介质可以是磁性介质(例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带),光介质(例如,DVD)、或者半导体介质(例如固态硬盘(solid state disk,SSD))等。In the above embodiments, it may be implemented in whole or in part by software, hardware, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented using a software program, it can be implemented in the form of a computer program product in whole or in part. The computer program product includes one or more computer instructions. When the computer program instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are generated in whole or in part. The computer can be a general-purpose computer, a special-purpose computer, a computer network, or other programmable devices. Computer instructions may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium, or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium. For example, computer instructions may be transmitted from a website, computer, server, or data center through a cable (such as Coaxial cable, optical fiber, digital subscriber line (digital subscriber line, DSL) or wireless (such as infrared, wireless, microwave, etc.) transmission to another website site, computer, server or data center. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or may include one or more data storage devices such as a server or a data center that can be integrated with the medium. The usable medium may be a magnetic medium (for example, a floppy disk, a hard disk, and a magnetic tape), an optical medium (for example, a DVD), or a semiconductor medium (for example, a solid state disk (SSD)).
尽管在此结合各实施例对本申请进行了描述,然而,在实施所要求保护的本申请过程中,本领域技术人员通过查看附图、公开内容、以及所附权利要求书,可理解并实现公开实施例的其他变化。在权利要求中,“包括”(comprising)一词不排除其他组成部分或步骤,“一”或“一个”不排除多个的情况。单个处理器或其他单元可以实现权利要求中列举的若干项功能。相互不同的从属权利要求中记载了某些措施,但这并不表示这些措施不能组合起来产生良好的效果。Although the present application is described in conjunction with various embodiments, in the process of implementing the claimed application, those skilled in the art can understand and realize the disclosure by looking at the drawings, the disclosure, and the appended claims. Other changes to the embodiment. In the claims, the word "comprising" does not exclude other components or steps, and "a" or "one" does not exclude a plurality. A single processor or other unit may implement several functions listed in the claims. Certain measures are described in mutually different dependent claims, but this does not mean that these measures cannot be combined to produce good results.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的保护范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的本申请的示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的保护范围。这样,倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Although the application has been described in combination with specific features and embodiments, it is obvious that various modifications and combinations can be made without departing from the scope of protection of the application. Correspondingly, the specification and drawings are merely exemplary descriptions of the application as defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, changes, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application. Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to this application without departing from the protection scope of this application. In this way, if these modifications and variations of this application fall within the scope of the claims of this application and their equivalent technologies, then this application is also intended to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (49)

  1. 一种定位方法,其特征在于,包括:A positioning method, characterized in that it comprises:
    定位管理组件LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The location management component LMC sends a registration request to the core network element, where the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC支持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述LMC是否支持第一定位类型。The LMC receives a registration response from the core network element, where the registration response includes first indication information, where the first indication information is used to indicate the positioning type supported by the LMC; or, the first indication information It is used to indicate whether the LMC supports the first positioning type.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述LMC支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:网络发起定位请求NI-LR,移动终端终止定位请求MT-LR,移动终端起源定位请求MO-LR,无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The method according to claim 1, wherein the positioning types supported by the LMC include one or more of the following positioning types: network initiated positioning request NI-LR, mobile terminal termination positioning request MT-LR, mobile The terminal originates a positioning request MO-LR, and the radio access network initiates a positioning request RI-LR.
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。The method according to claim 1, wherein the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  4. 根据权利要求1-3中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述核心网网元为接入和移动性管理功能AMF或定位管理功能LMF。The method according to any one of claims 1-3, wherein the core network element is an access and mobility management function AMF or a location management function LMF.
  5. 一种定位方法,其特征在于,包括:A positioning method, characterized in that it comprises:
    定位管理组件LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The location management component LMC sends a registration request to the core network element, where the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的M1个网络设备的信息,M1为大于0的整数;The LMC receives a registration response from the core network element, where the registration response includes information about M1 network devices that support the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0;
    所述LMC向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示与其对应的网络设备支持所述第二定位类型。The LMC sends second indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M1 network devices, where the second indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding network device supports the second Targeting type.
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 5, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。The LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M1 network devices.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。The method according to claim 6, wherein the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a network device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  8. 根据权利要求5-7中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 5-7, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的相关信息,M2为大于0的整数。The LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support relevant information of M2 network devices whose information of the second positioning type changes, and M2 is an integer greater than 0.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 8, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为所述M2个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。The LMC sends third indication information to the first network device, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the first network device is the M2 network Any network device in the device.
  10. 根据权利要求5-9中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二定位类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The method according to any one of claims 5-9, wherein the second positioning type is a radio access network initiated positioning request RI-LR.
  11. 一种定位方法,其特征在于,包括:A positioning method, characterized in that it comprises:
    网络设备从定位管理组件LMC接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述网络设备;The network device receives fourth indication information from the positioning management component LMC, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the cell indicated by the fourth indication information belongs to the network device;
    在所述网络设备需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,所述网络设备向所述LMC发送定位请求。When the network device needs to locate a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type, the network device sends a positioning request to the LMC.
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 11, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。The network device receives the location information of the LMC from the LMC.
  13. 根据权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。The method according to claim 12, wherein the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a network device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  14. 根据权利要求11-13中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 11-13, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述网络设备从所述LMC接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述网络设备的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N2个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N2为大于0的整数。The network device receives fifth indication information from the LMC, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the network device supports the second positioning type, and the first cell is among N2 cells Any one or more cells in, the N2 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N2 is an integer greater than 0.
  15. 根据权利要求11-14中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二定位类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The method according to any one of claims 11-14, wherein the second positioning type is a radio access network initiated positioning request RI-LR.
  16. 一种定位方法,其特征在于,包括:A positioning method, characterized in that it comprises:
    定位管理组件LMC向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The location management component LMC sends a registration request to the core network element, where the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的Q1个终端的信息,所述Q1个终端接入M7个网络设备,Q1和M7均为大于0的整数;The LMC receives a registration response from the core network element. The registration response includes information about Q1 terminals supporting the second positioning type. The Q1 terminals access M7 network devices, and both Q1 and M7 are greater than An integer of 0;
    所述LMC向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备。The LMC sends sixth indication information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices, where the sixth indication information is used to indicate that one or more of the second positioning types are supported. Multiple terminals, where the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access a network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  17. 根据权利要求16所述的方法,其特征在于,所述注册响应中还包括所述M7个网络设备的信息。The method according to claim 16, wherein the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
  18. 根据权利要求16或17所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 16 or 17, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述LMC的位置信息。The LMC sends the location information of the LMC to each of the M7 network devices.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的方法,其特征在于,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的网络设备的标识或所述LMC的标识。The method according to claim 18, wherein the location information of the LMC is an identifier of a network device where the LMC is located or an identifier of the LMC.
  20. 根据权利要求16-19中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to any one of claims 16-19, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q2个终端的相关信息,Q2为大于0的整数。The LMC receives update information from the core network element, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the related information of Q2 terminals whose information of the second positioning type changes, and Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
  21. 根据权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method according to claim 20, wherein the method further comprises:
    所述LMC向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为所述Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。The LMC sends seventh indication information to a third network device, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether a first terminal accessing the third network device supports the second positioning type, and the first terminal is Any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
  22. 根据权利要求16-21中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二定位类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The method according to any one of claims 16-21, wherein the second positioning type is a radio access network initiated positioning request RI-LR.
  23. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元和通信单元;A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processing unit and a communication unit;
    所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括第一指示信息,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述定位装置支持的定位类型;或者,所述第一指示信息用于指示所述定位装置是否支持第一定位类型。The processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, where the registration response includes first indication information, and the first indication information is used to indicate that the positioning device supports Positioning type; or, the first indication information is used to indicate whether the positioning apparatus supports the first positioning type.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述定位装置支持的定位类型包括以下定位类型中的一种或多种:网络发起定位请求NI-LR,移动终端终止定位请求MT-LR,移动终端起源定位请求MO-LR,无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The positioning device according to claim 23, wherein the positioning types supported by the positioning device include one or more of the following positioning types: a network initiates a positioning request NI-LR, and a mobile terminal terminates a positioning request MT-LR , The mobile terminal originates a positioning request MO-LR, and the radio access network initiates a positioning request RI-LR.
  25. 根据权利要求23所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述第一定位类型包括以下定位类型中的任意一种:NI-LR,MT-LR,MO-LR,RI-LR。The positioning device according to claim 23, wherein the first positioning type includes any one of the following positioning types: NI-LR, MT-LR, MO-LR, RI-LR.
  26. 根据权利要求23-25中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述核心网网元为接入和移动性管理功能AMF或定位管理功能LMF。The positioning device according to any one of claims 23-25, wherein the core network element is an access and mobility management function AMF or a positioning management function LMF.
  27. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元和通信单元;A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processing unit and a communication unit;
    所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的M1个网络设备的信息,M1为大于0的整数;The processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, the registration response includes information about M1 network devices supporting the second positioning type, and M1 is an integer greater than 0;
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第二指示信息,所述第二指示信息用于指示与其对应的网络设备支持所述第二定位类型。The processing unit is further configured to send second instruction information corresponding to each network device to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit, where the second instruction information is used to indicate The corresponding network device supports the second positioning type.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to claim 27, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M1个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述定位装置的位置信息。The processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M1 network devices through the communication unit.
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述定位装置的位置信息为所述定位装置所在的网络设备的标识或所述定位装置的标识。The positioning device according to claim 28, wherein the location information of the positioning device is an identification of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identification of the positioning device.
  30. 根据权利要求27-29中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to any one of claims 27-29, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的M2个网络设备的相关信息,M2为大于0的整数。The processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the correlation of the M2 network devices whose information of the second positioning type has changed. Information, M2 is an integer greater than 0.
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to claim 30, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第一网络设备发送第三指示信息,所述第三指示信息用于指示所述第一网络设备是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一网络设备为所述M2个网络设备中的任意一个网络设备。The processing unit is further configured to send third indication information to the first network device through the communication unit, where the third indication information is used to indicate whether the first network device supports the second positioning type, and the The first network device is any one of the M2 network devices.
  32. 根据权利要求27-31中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述第二定位类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The positioning device according to any one of claims 27-31, wherein the second positioning type is a positioning request RI-LR initiated by a radio access network.
  33. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元和通信单元;A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processing unit and a communication unit;
    所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元从定位管理组件LMC接收第四指示信息,所述第四指示信息用于指示支持第二定位类型的一个或多个小区,所述第四指示信息指示的小区属于所述定位装置;The processing unit is configured to receive fourth indication information from the positioning management component LMC through the communication unit, where the fourth indication information is used to indicate one or more cells that support the second positioning type, and the fourth indication information The indicated cell belongs to the positioning device;
    所述处理单元,还用于在所述定位装置需要对支持所述第二定位类型的小区中的终端定位时,通过所述通信单元向所述LMC发送定位请求。The processing unit is further configured to send a positioning request to the LMC through the communication unit when the positioning device needs to position a terminal in a cell that supports the second positioning type.
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to claim 33, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收所述LMC的位置信息。The processing unit is further configured to receive the location information of the LMC from the LMC through the communication unit.
  35. 根据权利要求34所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述LMC的位置信息为所述LMC所在的定位装置的标识或所述LMC的标识。The positioning device according to claim 34, wherein the location information of the LMC is an identification of the positioning device where the LMC is located or an identification of the LMC.
  36. 根据权利要求33-35中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to any one of claims 33-35, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述LMC接收第五指示信息,所述第五指示信息用于指示所述定位装置的第一小区是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一小区为N2个小区中的任意一个或多个小区,所述N2个小区为是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的小区,N2为大于0的整数。The processing unit is further configured to receive fifth indication information from the LMC through the communication unit, where the fifth indication information is used to indicate whether the first cell of the positioning device supports the second positioning type, and The first cell is any one or more of the N2 cells, the N2 cells are cells whose information about whether to support the second positioning type changes, and N2 is an integer greater than 0.
  37. 根据权利要求33-36中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述第二定位类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The positioning device according to any one of claims 33-36, wherein the second positioning type is a positioning request RI-LR initiated by a radio access network.
  38. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理单元和通信单元;A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processing unit and a communication unit;
    所述处理单元,用于通过所述通信单元向核心网网元发送注册请求,所述注册请求用于请求注册到所述核心网网元;The processing unit is configured to send a registration request to a core network element through the communication unit, and the registration request is used to request registration to the core network element;
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收注册响应,所述注册响应中包括支持第二定位类型的Q1个终端的信息,所述Q1个终端接入M7个网络设备,Q1和M7均为大于0的整数;The processing unit is further configured to receive a registration response from the core network element through the communication unit, where the registration response includes information about Q1 terminals that support the second positioning type, and the Q1 terminals access the M7 A network device, Q1 and M7 are both integers greater than 0;
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送与所述每个网络设备对应的第六指示信息,所述第六指示信息用于指示支持所述第二定位类型的一个或多个终端,所述第六指示信息指示的所述一个或多个终端接入与所述第六指示信息对应的网络设备。The processing unit is further configured to send sixth instruction information corresponding to each network device to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit, where the sixth instruction information is used to indicate One or more terminals that support the second positioning type, and the one or more terminals indicated by the sixth indication information access a network device corresponding to the sixth indication information.
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述注册响应中还包括所述M7个网络设备的信息。The positioning device according to claim 38, wherein the registration response further includes information of the M7 network devices.
  40. 根据权利要求38或39所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to claim 38 or 39, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向所述M7个网络设备中的每个网络设备发送所述定位装置的位置信息。The processing unit is further configured to send the location information of the positioning device to each of the M7 network devices through the communication unit.
  41. 根据权利要求40所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述定位装置的位置信息为所述定位装置所在的网络设备的标识或所述定位装置的标识。The positioning device according to claim 40, wherein the location information of the positioning device is an identification of a network device where the positioning device is located or an identification of the positioning device.
  42. 根据权利要求38-41中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to any one of claims 38-41, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元从所述核心网网元接收更新信息,所述更新信息用于指示是否支持所述第二定位类型的信息发生变化的Q2个终端的相关信息,Q2为大于0的整数。The processing unit is further configured to receive update information from the core network element through the communication unit, where the update information is used to indicate whether to support the Q2 terminal related information whose information of the second positioning type has changed , Q2 is an integer greater than 0.
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的定位装置,其特征在于,The positioning device according to claim 42, wherein:
    所述处理单元,还用于通过所述通信单元向第三网络设备发送第七指示信息,所述第七指示信息用于指示接入所述第三网络设备的第一终端是否支持所述第二定位类型,所述第一终端为所述Q2个终端中的任意一个或多个终端。The processing unit is further configured to send seventh indication information to a third network device through the communication unit, where the seventh indication information is used to indicate whether the first terminal accessing the third network device supports the first terminal 2. Positioning type, the first terminal is any one or more of the Q2 terminals.
  44. 根据权利要求38-43中任一项所述的定位装置,其特征在于,所述第二定位 类型为无线接入网发起定位请求RI-LR。The positioning device according to any one of claims 38-43, wherein the second positioning type is a positioning request RI-LR initiated by a radio access network.
  45. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器;A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processor;
    所述处理器与存储器连接,所述存储器用于存储计算机执行指令,所述处理器执行所述存储器存储的所述计算机执行指令,以使所述定位装置实现如权利要求1-4中任一项,或者,权利要求5-10中任一项,或者,权利要求11-15中任一项,或者,权利要求16-22中任一项所述的方法。The processor is connected to a memory, and the memory is used to store computer-executable instructions, and the processor executes the computer-executable instructions stored in the memory, so that the positioning device implements any one of claims 1-4 Item, or, any one of claims 5-10, or, any one of claims 11-15, or, the method of any one of claims 16-22.
  46. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,包括:处理器和接口,所述处理器通过接口与存储器耦合,当所述处理器执行所述存储器中的计算机程序或计算机执行指令时,使得如权利要求1-4中任一项,或者,权利要求5-10中任一项,或者,权利要求11-15中任一项,或者,权利要求16-22中任一项所述的方法被执行。A positioning device, characterized by comprising: a processor and an interface, the processor is coupled with the memory through the interface, and when the processor executes the computer program or the computer execution instruction in the memory, it is as follows: Any one of -4, or any one of claims 5-10, or any one of claims 11-15, or any one of claims 16-22 is executed.
  47. 一种定位装置,其特征在于,所述定位装置包括处理器、存储器以及存储在所述存储器上并在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,当所述计算机程序被运行时,使得所述定位装置执行如权利要求1-4中任一项,或者,权利要求5-10中任一项,或者,权利要求11-15中任一项,或者,权利要求16-22中任一项所述的方法。A positioning device, characterized in that the positioning device includes a processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and running on the processor, and when the computer program is executed, the positioning The device performs as described in any one of claims 1-4, or any one of claims 5-10, or any one of claims 11-15, or any one of claims 16-22 Methods.
  48. 一种计算机可读存储介质,其特征在于,包括计算机执行指令,当所述计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-4中任一项,或者,权利要求5-10中任一项,或者,权利要求11-15中任一项,或者,权利要求16-22中任一项所述的方法。A computer-readable storage medium, characterized by comprising computer-executable instructions, when the computer-executable instructions run on the computer, the computer executes any one of claims 1-4, or claims 5-10 Any of, or, any of claims 11-15, or, the method of any of claims 16-22.
  49. 一种计算机程序产品,其特征在于,包括计算机执行指令,当所述计算机执行指令在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行如权利要求1-4中任一项,或者,权利要求5-10中任一项,或者,权利要求11-15中任一项,或者,权利要求16-22中任一项所述的方法。A computer program product, characterized in that it comprises a computer-executable instruction, when the computer-executable instruction runs on a computer, it causes the computer to execute any one of claims 1-4, or any one of claims 5-10 One, or, any one of claims 11-15, or, the method of any one of claims 16-22.
PCT/CN2020/088447 2020-04-30 2020-04-30 Positioning method and apparatus WO2021217629A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/088447 WO2021217629A1 (en) 2020-04-30 2020-04-30 Positioning method and apparatus
CN202080100293.4A CN115462133A (en) 2020-04-30 2020-04-30 Positioning method and device

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/088447 WO2021217629A1 (en) 2020-04-30 2020-04-30 Positioning method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2021217629A1 true WO2021217629A1 (en) 2021-11-04

Family

ID=78331644

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/088447 WO2021217629A1 (en) 2020-04-30 2020-04-30 Positioning method and apparatus

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115462133A (en)
WO (1) WO2021217629A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200053638A1 (en) * 2018-08-13 2020-02-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for supporting unified location of a mobile device in a 5g network
US20200084569A1 (en) * 2018-09-12 2020-03-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for enhancement of positioning related protocols
US20200092776A1 (en) * 2018-09-14 2020-03-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for deferred 5g location of a mobile device using a combined amf and lmf based location solution
WO2020069757A1 (en) * 2018-10-05 2020-04-09 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Location management component and method for a mobile communication network

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20200053638A1 (en) * 2018-08-13 2020-02-13 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for supporting unified location of a mobile device in a 5g network
US20200084569A1 (en) * 2018-09-12 2020-03-12 Qualcomm Incorporated Methods and systems for enhancement of positioning related protocols
US20200092776A1 (en) * 2018-09-14 2020-03-19 Qualcomm Incorporated Systems and methods for deferred 5g location of a mobile device using a combined amf and lmf based location solution
WO2020069757A1 (en) * 2018-10-05 2020-04-09 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Location management component and method for a mobile communication network

Non-Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
CMCC: "Remaining aspects for Local LMF support in NG-RAN", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-197264, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. Reno, USA; 20191018 - 20191022, 9 November 2019 (2019-11-09), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051824103 *
HUAWEI, HISILICON: "Further update of Solution 15 for enhancement to LCS architecture", 3GPP DRAFT; S2-1811105 WAS S2-1810781_FURTHER_UPDATES_OF_SOLUTION_15_CL_V1, 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. SA WG2, no. Dongguan, P. R. China; 20181015 - 20181019, 17 October 2018 (2018-10-17), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051539960 *
QUALCOMM INCORPORATED: "TP for TR 38.856: Location Service Operation", 3GPP DRAFT; R3-195820_[TP FOR TR 38.856 LCS PROCEDURES], 3RD GENERATION PARTNERSHIP PROJECT (3GPP), MOBILE COMPETENCE CENTRE ; 650, ROUTE DES LUCIOLES ; F-06921 SOPHIA-ANTIPOLIS CEDEX ; FRANCE, vol. RAN WG3, no. Chongqing, China; 20191014 - 20191018, 4 October 2019 (2019-10-04), Mobile Competence Centre ; 650, route des Lucioles ; F-06921 Sophia-Antipolis Cedex ; France , XP051792839 *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115462133A (en) 2022-12-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP7401575B2 (en) Communication methods, access network devices, and core network devices
WO2021093515A1 (en) Data transmission method and related apparatus
US11812496B2 (en) User group session management method and apparatus
US20210099351A1 (en) Network Configuration Method and Communications Apparatus
CN110913472B (en) Positioning management method and device, 5G wireless access network node and core network node
US8644255B1 (en) Wireless device access to communication services through another wireless device
US11751084B2 (en) Network node, user equipment and base station used in a communication system and method for location resource coordination
WO2020168753A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
WO2019196817A1 (en) Location method and related device
WO2021243837A1 (en) Application data routing method based on ursp rule, and user equipment
TW201916709A (en) A method, a terminal device, a base station and a core network device for configuring anr
WO2020052481A1 (en) Capability information receiving and transmitting method, and capability information receiving and transmitting apparatus
CN110650029B (en) Configuration method and device
BR112019016902A2 (en) method to establish the connection of LAN, terminal and network devices
JP2016505229A (en) Communication control method, user equipment, network server, and system
WO2020042848A1 (en) Network slice management method and apparatus
CN110719611A (en) Message sending method and device
JP2019534636A (en) Session management method and session management network element
US20210120613A1 (en) Data sending method, apparatus, and system
WO2021217629A1 (en) Positioning method and apparatus
WO2023179238A1 (en) Timing method, communication apparatus, and communication system
WO2023229855A1 (en) Methods, systems, and computer readable media for utilizing network function (nf) service attributes associated with registered nf service producers in a hierarchical network
WO2021056577A1 (en) Information update method, device and system
WO2022041131A1 (en) Transmission delay compensation method and apparatus, device, and storage medium
WO2021159415A1 (en) Communication method, apparatus, and system

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20934208

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 20934208

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1